Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                

Manual Pioneer VSX 1019AH K

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 127

audio/video multi-channel receiver

VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 1
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
dangerous voltage within the products
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
CAUTION:
TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR
BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT
D3-4-2-1-1_A1_En
Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel.
D3-4-2-1-2-2_B_En
IMPORTANT: THE MOULDED PLUG
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 10 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the
fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 10 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.
Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover the plug
must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be obtained from your local dealer.
If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for your socket outlet, then the fuse shall be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of
safely. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13 amp socket.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:
Blue : Neutral Brown : Live
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in
your plug, proceed as follows ;
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the
letter L or coloured RED.
How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.
WARNING
The voltage of the available power supply differs
according to country or region. Be sure that the
power supply voltage of the area where this unit
will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230 V
or 120 V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En
Before plugging in for the first time, read the following
section carefully.
WARNING
To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked
flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the
equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En
WARNING
This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire
or shock hazard, do not place any container filled
with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or
flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain
or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_B_En
This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive
2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC.
D3-4-2-1-9a_A1_En
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 2
Information for users on collection and disposal of old equipment and used batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean
that used electrical and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with
general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries,
please take them to applicable collection points in accordance with your national
legislation.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable
resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the
environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries,
please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of
sale where you purchased the items.
These symbols are only valid in the European Union.
For countries outside the European Union:
If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and
ask for the correct method of disposal.
K058a_A1_En
Symbol examples
for batteries
Symbol for
equipment
Pb
VENTILATION CAUTION
When installing this unit, make sure to leave space
around the unit for ventilation to improve heat
radiation (at least 60 cm at top, 10 cm at rear, and
30 cm at each side).
WARNING
Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for
ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the
product, and to protect it from overheating. To
prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be
blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers,
table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the
equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En
Operating Environment
Operating environment temperature and humidity:
+5 C to +35 C (+41 F to +95 F); less than 85 %RH
(cooling vents not blocked)
Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in
locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or
strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1-7c_A_En
This product is for general household purposes. Any
failure due to use for other than household purposes
(such as long-term use for business purposes in a
restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which
requires repair will be charged for even during the
warranty period. K041_En
CAUTION
The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not
completely shut off all power from the AC outlet.
Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect
device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from
the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore,
make sure the unit has been installed so that the
power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC
outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard,
the power cord should also be unplugged from the
AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time
(for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-2a_A_En
If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC
outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed
and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and
mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of
this unit should be performed only by qualified
service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the
cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make
sure it is properly disposed of after removal.
The equipment should be disconnected by removing
the mains plug from the wall socket when left
unused for a long period of time (for example, when
on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 3
Contents
01 Before you start
Checking whats in the box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Loading the batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
02 Controls and displays
Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating range of remote control unit. . . . . 13
03 Connecting your equipment
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Determining the speakers application . . . . . . 15
Other speaker connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Placing the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Some tips for improving sound quality . . . . . 17
Connecting the speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installing your speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Bi-amping your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Bi-wiring your speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Selecting the Surr Back system . . . . . . . . . . . 21
ZONE 2 setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Speaker B setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bi-Amping setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
About the audio connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
About the video converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Connecting your TV and playback
components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting using HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connecting your DVD player
with no HDMI output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input . . . 26
Connecting a satellite/cable receiver or
other set-top box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and
other video sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs . . . 28
Connecting other audio components . . . . . . . 29
About the WMA9 Pro decoder . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting AM/FM antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Connecting external antennas . . . . . . . . . . . 30
MULTI-ZONE setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Making MULTI-ZONE connections . . . . . . . . 31
Connecting an IR receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Operating other Pioneer components
with this units sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting a component to the front panel
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Connecting an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Connecting a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Plugging in the receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
04 Basic Setup
Switching the speaker impedance. . . . . . . . . . 36
Changing the OSD display language
(OSD Language) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Problems when using
the Auto MCACC Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
The Input Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Input function default and possible settings. . . 40
05 Basic playback
Playing a source. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Playing a source with HDMI connection . . . . 42
Selecting the multichannel analog inputs. . . 42
Playing an iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Playing back audio files stored on an iPod . . 43
Playing a USB device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing back audio files stored
on a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Playing back photo files stored
on a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
About playable file formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Listening to the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Improving FM sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Using Neural THX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tuning directly to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Saving station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Naming station presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Listening to station presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
An introduction to RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
06 Listening to your system
Auto playback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Listening in surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Standard surround sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using the Advanced surround effects . . . . . . 53
Listening in stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Using Front Stage Surround Advance . . . . . . . 54
Using Stream Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Using surround back channel processing . . . . 55
Using the Virtual Surround Back mode. . . . . 56
Setting the Up Mix function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Selecting MCACC presets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Choosing the input signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Better sound using Phase Control. . . . . . . . . . 58
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product. Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them away in a safe place for future reference.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 4
E
n
g
l
i
s
h
I
t
a
l
i
a
n
o
F
r
a
n

a
i
s
N
e
d
e
r
l
a
n
d
s
E
s
p
a

o
l
D
e
u
t
s
c
h
07 KURO LINK
Making the KURO LINK connections . . . . . . . 59
Cautions on the KURO LINK function. . . . . . 60
About connections with a product of
a different brand that supports
the KURO LINK function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
KURO LINK Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Setting the PQLS function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Before using synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Synchronized amp mode operations . . . . . . 62
Canceling synchronized amp mode . . . . . . . 62
08 Using other functions
Setting the Audio options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Setting the Video options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Switching the speaker system . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Making an audio or a video recording . . . . . . . 69
Reducing the level of an analog signal . . . . . . 70
Using the sleep timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Dimming the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Checking your system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Resetting the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Default system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
09 Controlling the rest of your system
Operating multiple receivers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting the remote to control
other components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Selecting preset codes directly . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Resetting the remote control presets . . . . . . . 73
Default preset codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Controls the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
10 The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Automatic MCACC (Expert) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Manual MCACC setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fine Channel Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fine Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust . . . . . . . . . . 84
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional . . . . . . 85
Checking MCACC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Speaker Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Standing Wave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Acoustic Cal EQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Renaming MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Copying MCACC preset data . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Clearing MCACC presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
11 The system and the other setup
Making receiver settings from
the System Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Manual speaker setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Surround back speaker setting. . . . . . . . . . . 93
Speaker Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Channel Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Speaker Distance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
X-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
The Other Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Multi Channel Input Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ZONE Audio Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Power ON Level Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Volume Limit Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Remote Control Mode Setup . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Flicker Reduction Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
12 Additional information
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
No sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Other audio problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Professional Calibration EQ graphical
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
HDMI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Important information regarding
the HDMI connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Surround sound formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Dolby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
DTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional . . . . . 112
About iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
About Neural THX Surround. . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct
with different input signal formats. . . . . . . . . 114
Preset code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Cleaning the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 5
6
En
Flow of settings on the receiver
The unit is a full-fledged AV receiver equipped
with an abundance of functions and terminals.
It can be used easily after following the
procedure below to make the connections and
settings.
The colors of the steps indicate the following:
Required setting item
Setting to be made as necessary
1 Before you start
Checking whats in the box (page 7)
Loading the batteries (page 7)

2 Determining the speakers application


(page 15)
7.1ch surround connection
5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping
connection
5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection
5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection

3 Connecting the speakers


Placing the speakers (page 17)
Connecting the speakers (page 18)
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections (page 19)
Bi-amping your speakers (page 20)

4 Connecting the components


About the audio connection (page 22)
About the video converter (page 22)
Connecting your TV and playback
components (page 23)
Connecting AM/FM antennas (page 30)
Plugging in the receiver (page 35)

5 Switching the speaker impedance


(page 36)
(Only if the impedance of the connected
speakers is 6 to 8 )

6 Power On

7 Changing the OSD display language


(OSD Language) (page 36)

8 Surround back speaker setting (page


93)

9 MCACC speaker settings


Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) (page 37)

10 The Input Setup menu (page 39)


(When using connections other than the
recommended connections)

11 Basic playback (page 41)

12 Adjusting the sound and picture


quality as desired
Using the various listening modes
Using surround back channel processing
(page 55)
Better sound using Phase Control (page 58)
Switches on/off the Acoustic Calibration
EQ, Sound retriever or Dialog Enhancement
(page 63)
Change the channel level while listening
(Tip on page 96)
Measure the all EQ type (SYMMETRY/ALL
CH ADJ/FRONT ALIGN) (page 77)
Setting the PQLS function (page 61)
Setting the Audio options (Tone, Loudness
or Sound delay, etc.) (page 63)
Setting the Video options (page 66)

13 Other optional adjustments and


settings
KURO LINK Setup (page 61)
The Advanced MCACC menu (page 76)
The system and the other setup (page 92)

14 Making maximum use of the remote


control
Operating multiple receivers (page 72)
Setting the remote to control other
components (page 72)
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 6
Before you start 01
7
En
Chapter 1:
Before you start
Checking whats in the box
Please check that youve received the following
supplied accessories:
Setup microphone (cable: 5 m)
Remote control unit
AA size IEC R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm
system operation) x2
AM loop antenna
FM wire antenna
iPod cable
Power cord
Warranty card
These operating instructions
Installing the receiver
When installing this unit, make sure to put
it on a level and stable surface.
Dont install it on the following places:
on a color TV (the screen may distort)
near a cassette deck (or close to a device that
gives off a magnetic field). This may interfere
with the sound.
in direct sunlight
in damp or wet areas
in extremely hot or cold areas
in places where there is vibration or other
movement
in places that are very dusty
in places that have hot fumes or oils (such as
a kitchen)
Do not touch this receivers bottom panel
while the power is turned on. The bottom
panel gets hot when the power is on, and
touching it could cause burns.
Loading the batteries
CAUTION
Incorrect use of batteries may result in such
hazards as leakage and bursting. Observe the
following precautions:
Never use new and old batteries together.
Insert the plus and minus sides of the
batteries properly according to the marks
in the battery case.
Batteries with the same shape may have
different voltages. Do not use different
batteries together.
When disposing of used batteries, please
comply with governmental regulations or
environmental public instructions rules
that apply in your country or area.
WARNING
Do not use or store batteries in direct
sunlight or other excessively hot place,
such as inside a car or near a heater. This
can cause batteries to leak, overheat,
explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the
life or performance of batteries.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 7
Controls and displays 02
8
En
Chapter 2:
Controls and displays
Front panel
1 INPUT SELECTOR dial
Use to select an input function.
2 C STANDBY/ON
Switches the receiver between on and standby.
Power indicator lights when the receiver is on.
When the KURO LINK function is set to ON,
the power indicator lights dimly when the
power is in standby.
3 Tuner controls
BAND Switches between AM and FM
radio bands (page 49).
TUNE +/ Use to find radio frequencies
(page 49).
PRESET +/ Use to find preset stations
(page 50).
TUNER EDIT Use with TUNE +/, PRESET
+/ and ENTER to memorize and name
stations for recall (page 50).
4 PHASE CONTROL indicator Lights to
indicate Phase Control is selected
(page 58).
ADVANCED MCACC indicator Lights
when EQ is set to ON in the AUDIO
PARAMETER menu.
HDMI indicator Blinks when connecting
an HDMI-equipped component; lights when
the component is connected (page 23).
5 Character display
See Display on page 9.
6 ENTER
7 Remote sensor
Receives the signals from the remote control
(see Operating range of remote control unit on
page 13).
8 MASTER VOLUME dial
MASTER
VOLUME
INPUT
SELECTOR
STANDBY/ON
AUDIO/VIDEO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER
PHONES
BAND TUNE TUNE
PHASE
CONTROL
AUTO SURR/ALC/
STREAM DIRECT
ADVANCED
SURROUND
STANDARD
SURROUND
MCACC
SETUP MIC
STEREO SPEAKERS
USB VIDEO L R AUDIO
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON/ OFF
ADVANCED
MCACC HDMI PRESET PRESET TUNER EDIT
ENTER
iPod
iPhone
VIDEO INPUT
1 2 3 4 5
9 10 13 12 11 14
7 8 6
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 8
Controls and displays 02
9
En
9 PHONES jack
Use to connect headphones. When the
headphones are connected, there is no sound
output from the speakers.
10 Listening mode buttons
AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT
Switches between Auto Surround (page 52),
Auto level control mode and Stream Direct
mode (page 55).
STEREO Switches between stereo
playback, and Front Stage Surround
Advance modes (page 54).
ADVANCED SURROUND Use to switch
between the various surround modes
(page 53).
STANDARD SURROUND Press for
Standard decoding and to switch between
the various 2 Pro Logic IIx and Neo:6
options (page 52).
11 SPEAKERS
Use to change the speaker system (page 68).
12 MULTI-ZONE controls
If youve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see
MULTI-ZONE setup on page 31) use these
controls to control the sub zone from the main
zone (see Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on
page 68).
13 iPod/iPhone/USB, VIDEO INPUT
terminals
Use to connect your Apple iPod as an audio
and video source, or connect a USB device for
audio and photo playback (page 34).
See Connecting a component to the front panel
inputs on page 33.
14 MCACC SETUP MIC jack
Use to connect the supplied microphone
(page 37).
Display
1 SIGNAL indicators
Light to indicate the currently selected input
signal. AUTO lights when the receiver is set to
select the input signal automatically (page 57).
2 Program format indicators
Light to indicate the channels being input
when PCM signals are being input. They do not
indicate the audio signals being output from
the receiver.
L/R Left front/Right front channel
C Center channel
SL/SR Left surround/Right surround channel
LFE Low frequency effects channel (the (( ))
indicators light when an LFE signal is being input)
XL/XR Two channels other than the ones above
XC Either one channel other than the ones above,
the mono surround channel or matrix encode flag
3 Digital format indicators
Light when a signal encoded in the corresponding
format is detected.
PCM
HDMI
DIGITAL
ANALOG
L C R
SL SR
XL XR XC
LFE
AUTO DIGITAL PLUS
AUTO SURROUND
STREAM DIRECT
PROLOGIC x Neo:6
ADV.SURROUND
STEREO STANDARD
SP AB SLEEP
DSD PCM
DTS HD ES 96/24
MSTR
S.RTRV SOUND UP MIX OVER MONO
dB
2
MULTI-ZONE STEREO TrueHD WMA9Pro
TUNED RDS
PQLS ALC ATT 2
2
USB VIDEO TV DVD
HDMI DVR BD
CD TUNER
CD-R iPod [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ]
2 1 3 12 8 9 10 7 6 5 13 11 14 15 16
22 23 18 19 20 21
17
10
4
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 9
Controls and displays 02
10
En
4 S.RTRV
Lights when the Sound Retriever function is
active (page 64).
5 MULTI-ZONE
Lights when the MULTI-ZONE feature is active
(page 68).
6 DSD PCM Light during DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) to PCM conversion with SACDs.
PCM Lights during playback of PCM
signals.
7 SOUND
Lights when any of the Midnight, Loudness or
tone controls feature is selected (page 63).
Lights when Dialog Enhancement is switched on.
8 PQLS
Lights when the PQLS feature is active (page 61).
9 UP MIX
Lights when the UP Mix is switched on (page 56).
10 Listening mode indicators
AUTO SURROUND Lights when the Auto
Surround feature is switched on (page 52).
ALC Lights when the ALC (Auto level
control) mode is selected (page 55).
STREAM DIRECT Lights when Direct/
Pure Direct is selected (page 55).
ADV.SURROUND Lights when one of the
Advanced Surround modes has been
selected (page 53).
STEREO Lights when stereo listening is
switched on (page 54).
STANDARD Lights when one of the
Standard Surround modes is switched on
(page 52).
11 (PHASE CONTROL)
Lights when the Phase Control is switched on
(page 58).
12 Analog signal indicators
Light to indicate reducing the level of an analog
signal (page 70).
13 Tuner indicators
TUNED Lights when a broadcast is being
received.
STEREO Lights when a stereo FM broadcast
is being received in auto stereo mode.
MONO Lights when the mono mode is set
using MPX.
RDS Lights when an RDS broadcast is
received.
14
Lights when the sound is muted (page 13).
15 Master volume level
Shows the overall volume level.
--- indicates the minimum level, and +12dB
indicates the maximum level.
16 Input function indicators
Light to indicate the input function you have
selected.
17 Scroll indicators
Light when there are more selectable items
when making the various settings.
18 Speaker indicators
Lights to indicate the current speaker system,
A and/or B (page 68).
19 SLEEP
Lights when the receiver is in sleep mode (page 70).
20 Matrix decoding format indicators
2PRO LOGIC IIx This lights to indicate
2 Pro Logic II / 2 Pro Logic IIx decoding
(page 52).
Neo:6 When one of the Neo:6 modes of the
receiver is on, this lights to indicate Neo:6
processing (page 52).
21 MSTR
Lights during playback of DTS-HD Master
Audio signal.
22 Character display
Displays various system information.
23 Remote control mode indicator
Lights to indicate the receivers remote control
mode setting. (Not displayed when set to 1.)
(page 72)
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 10
Controls and displays 02
11
En
Remote control
The remote has been conveniently color-coded
according to component control using the
following system:
White Receiver control, TV Control
Blue Other controls
1 C RECEIVER
This switches between standby and on for this
receiver.
2 Input function buttons
Press to select control of other components
(see Controlling the rest of your system on
page 72).
Use INPUT SELECT to select the input function
(page 41).
3 Number buttons and other receiver/
component controls
Use the number buttons to directly select a
radio frequency (page 49) or the tracks on a
CD, DVD, etc.
ENTER can be used to enter commands for TV
or DTV.
Press first to access:
SIGNAL SEL Use to select an input signal
(page 57).
MCACC Press to switch between MCACC
presets (page 57).
SLEEP Use to put the receiver in sleep
mode and select the amount of time before
sleep (page 70).
SBch Use to select the surround back/virtual
surround back channel mode (page 55).
A.ATT Attenuates (lowers) the level of an
analog input signal to prevent distortion
(page 70).
DIMMER Dims or brightens the display
(page 70).
CH LEVEL Press repeatedly to select a
channel, then use / to adjust the level
(page 96).
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER INPUT SELECT
VIDEO
iPod USB
INPUT
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOPMENU
BAND
MUTE
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST TOOLS
PTY
SEARCH
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VOL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
MAIN ZONE 2
HDD DVD
STANDARD STEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
CH
TV CONTROL
1 2 3
SLEEP MCACC SIGNAL SEL
4 5 6
DIMMER A.ATT SBch
7 8 9
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVEL D.ACCESS
0
ENTER
RECEIVER SOURCE
ENTER
TV/DTV
AUDIO INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
CH
RECEIVER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
RECEIVER TV CTRL
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
11
4
5
6
13
12
14
15
16
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 11
Controls and displays 02
12
En
Press TUNER first to access:
D.ACCESS After pressing, you can
access a radio station directly using the
number buttons (page 49).
CLASS Switches between the seven
banks (classes) of radio station presets
(page 50).
4 TV CONTROL buttons
These buttons are dedicated to control the TV
assigned to TV operation selector switch. Thus
if you only have one TV to hook up to this
system assign it to the TV operation selector
switch (see page 74 for more on this).
C Use to turn on/off the power of the TV.
INPUT Use to select the TV input signal.
CH +/ Use to select channels.
VOL +/ Use to adjust the volume on your
TV.
5 Tuner/component control buttons/HOME
MENU
These button controls can be accessed after
you have selected the corresponding input
function button (DVD, DVR, TV, etc.). The
BAND, T.EDIT and PTY SEARCH tuner
controls are explained on page 49 and page 50.
Press first to access:
AUDIO PARAMETER Use to access the
Audio options (page 63).
VIDEO PARAMETER Use to access the
Video options (page 66).
HOME MENU Use to access the Home
Menu (pages 36, 39, 61, 76, 92 and 97).
RETURN Press to confirm and exit the
current menu screen (also use to return to
the previous menu with DVDs or to select
closed captioning with DTV).
6 /// (TUNE/PRESET) /ENTER
Use the arrow buttons when setting up your
surround sound system (see page 76) and the
Audio or Video options (page 63 or 66). Also
used to control DVD menus/options and for
deck 1 of a double cassette deck player. Use
TUNE/ to find radio frequencies and use
PRESET / to find preset stations (page 50).
7 Receiver controls
Press first to access:
AUTO/ALC/DIRECT Switches between
Auto Surround (page 52), Auto level control
mode and Stream Direct mode (page 55).
STEREO Switches between stereo
playback, and Front Stage Surround
Advance modes (page 54).
STANDARD Press for Standard decoding
and to switch between the various 2 Pro
Logic IIx and Neo:6 options (page 52).
ADV SURR Use to switch between the
various surround modes (page 53).
8 Component control buttons
The main buttons (>, N, etc.) are used to
control a component after you have selected it
using the input function buttons.
The controls above these buttons can be
accessed after you have selected the
corresponding input function button (for
example DVD, DVR or TV). These buttons also
function as described below.
Press TUNER first to access:
MPX Switches between stereo and mono
reception of FM broadcasts. If the signal is
weak, then switching to mono will improve
the sound quality (page 49).
Press first to access:
PHASE CTRL Press to switch on/off
Phase Control (page 58).
STATUS Press to check selected receiver
settings (page 70).
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 12
Controls and displays 02
13
En
9 AUDIO Changes the audio or channel on
DVD discs.
DISPLAY Switches between named
station presets and radio frequencies.
CH +/ Use to select channels for DVD/
DVR units.
10 REMOTE SETUP Use to input the preset
code when making remote control settings
and to set the remote control mode
(page 72).
TV CTRL Use this button to set preset
code of your TVs manufacturer when
controlling TV (see Selecting preset codes
directly on page 72 for more on this).
11 MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch
Switch to perform operations in the main zone
and sub zone (page 69).
12 Remote control LED
Lights when a command is sent from the
remote control (page 72).
13 C SOURCE
Press to turn on/off other components
connected to the receiver (see page 72 for
more on this).
14 MASTER VOLUME +/
Use to set the listening volume.
15 MUTE
Mutes the sound or restores the sound if it has
been muted (adjusting the volume also
restores the sound).
16
Switches the remote to control the receiver
(used to select the white commands above the
number buttons (A.ATT, etc.)). Also use this
button to set up surround sound.
Operating range of remote control
unit
The remote control may not work properly if:
There are obstacles between the remote
control and the receivers remote sensor.
Direct sunlight or fluorescent light is
shining onto the remote sensor.
The receiver is located near a device that is
emitting infrared rays.
The receiver is operated simultaneously
with another infrared remote control unit.
RECEIVER
7 m
30
30
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 13
Connecting your equipment 03
14
En
Chapter 3:
Connecting your equipment
This receiver provides you with many connection possibilities, but it doesnt have to be difficult. This
page explains the kinds of components you can connect to make up your home theater system.
Rear panel
Important
Illustration shows the VSX-1019AH,
however connections for the VSX-919AH
are the same except where noted.
CAUTION
Before making or changing the
connections, switch off the power and
disconnect the power cord from the power
outlet. Plugging in should be the final step.
To avoid hum, do not lay connected cables
over the top of the receiver.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R L
(Single)
R FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK/
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
AM
LOOP
FM
UNBAL
75
OPTICAL
PRE OUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN ANTENNA
AC IN
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVD) (DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
B
A
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
AUDIO
L
Y
FRONT
BDIN IN 1 IN OUT 2 IN (DVD)
2 1
VSX-1019AH
VSX-919AH
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 14
Connecting your equipment 03
15
En
Determining the speakers
application
Surround sound with a strong sense of
presence can be enjoyed by connecting 7
speakers and 1 subwoofer. It is also possible to
achieve high sound quality using bi-amp
connections and to enjoy music in other rooms
using the MULTI-ZONE feature. High sound
quality can be achieved with a minimum of two
speakers.
Be sure to connect speakers to the front
left and right channels ( and ).
The Surr Back System setting must be
made if you use any of the connections
shown below other than [1] (see Selecting
the Surr Back system on page 21).
[1] 7.1ch surround connection
(Simple connection & Best surround)
*Default setting
These connections prioritize surround sound
with a speaker layout like that in a movie theater.
Surr Back System setting: Normal
(default)
If you have six speakers, either only
connect one surround back speaker (6.1 ch
surround), or connect for the 7.1-channel
setting as shown on the diagram below but
without the center speaker.
[2] 5.1ch surround & Front Bi-amping
connection (High quality surround)
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround
sound.
Surr Back System setting: Front Bi-Amp
*Bi-amp compatible speaker
[3] 5.1ch surround & ZONE 2 connection
(Multi Zone)
With these connections you can simultaneously
enjoy 5.1-channel surround sound in the main
zone with stereo playback on another
component in ZONE 2. (The selection of input
devices is limited.)
Surr Back System setting: ZONE 2
FL FR
SW
C
FL FR
SL
SBL SBR
SR
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right
Front
left
Surround
left
Surround
right
Surround
back left
Surround
back right
SW
C
FL FR
SL SR
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right*
Front
left*
Surround
left
Surround
right
SW
C
FL FR
SL SR
L
ZONE 2
R
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right
Front
left
Right Left
Surround
left
Surround
right
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 15
Connecting your equipment 03
16
En
[4] 5.1ch surround & Speaker B connection
With these connections you can
simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround
sound in the main zone with stereo playback of
the same sound on the B speakers.
Surr Back System setting: Speaker B
Other speaker connection
Your favorite speaker connections can be
selected even if you have fewer than 5.1
speakers.
When not connecting a subwoofer, connect
speakers with low frequency reproduction
capabilities to the front channel. (The
subwoofers low frequency component is
played from the front speakers, so the
speakers could be damaged.)
After connecting, be sure to conduct
the Auto MCACC (speaker environment
setting) procedure (page 37).
SW
C
FL FR
SL SR
Subwoofer
Center
Front
right
Front
left
Speaker B
Surround
left
Surround
right
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 16
Connecting your equipment 03
17
En
Placing the speakers
To achieve the best possible surround sound,
install your speakers as shown below.
5.1 channel surround system:
6.1 channel surround system:
7.1 channel surround system:
Some tips for improving sound quality
Where you put your speakers in the room has a
big effect on the quality of the sound. The
following guidelines should help you to get the
best sound from your system.
The subwoofer can be placed on the floor.
Ideally, the other speakers should be at
about ear-level when youre listening to
them. Putting the speakers on the floor
(except the subwoofer), or mounting them
very high on a wall is not recommended.
For the best stereo effect, place the front
speakers 2 m to 3 m apart, at equal
distance from the TV.
If youre using a center speaker, place the
front speakers at a wider angle. If not, place
them at a narrower angle.
Place the center speaker above or below
the TV so that the sound of the center
channel is localized at the TV screen. Also,
make sure the center speaker does not
cross the line formed by the leading edge
of the front left and right speakers.
It is best to angle the speakers towards the
listening position. The angle depends on
the size of the room. Use less of an angle
for bigger rooms.
Surround and surround back speakers
should be positioned 60 cm to 90 cm higher
than your ears and tilted slight downward.
Make sure the speakers dont face each
other. For DVD-Audio, the speakers should
be more directly behind the listener than for
home theater playback.
If the surround speakers cannot be set
directly to the side of the listening position
with a 7.1-channel system, the surround
effect can be enhanced by turning off the
UP Mix function (see Setting the Up Mix
function on page 56).
Try not to place the surround speakers
farther away from the listening position
than the front and center speakers. Doing
so can weaken the surround sound effect.
Center
Front left
Front right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Subwoofer
120 120
Center
Front left Front right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Subwoofer
120 120
Surround Back
Center
Front left Front right
Surround
left
Surround
right
Subwoofer
90
90
Surround back
left
Surround back
right
60
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 17
Connecting your equipment 03
18
En
Connecting the speakers
Each speaker connection on the receiver
comprises a positive (+) and negative ()
terminal. Make sure to match these up with the
terminals on the speakers themselves.
CAUTION
These speaker terminals carry
HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent
the risk of electric shock when connecting
or disconnecting the speaker cables,
disconnect the power cord before touching
any uninsulated parts.
Make sure that all the bare speaker wire is
twisted together and inserted fully into the
speaker terminal. If any of the bare speaker
wire touches the back panel it may cause
the power to cut off as a safety measure.
Bare wire connections
1 Twist exposed wire strands together.
(fig. A)
2 Loosen terminal and insert exposed wire.
(fig. B)
3 Tighten terminal. (fig. C)
Important
Please refer to the manual that came with
your speakers for details on how to connect
the other end of the speaker cables to your
speakers.
Use an RCA cable to connect the subwoofer.
It is not possible to connect using speaker
cables.
CAUTION
Make sure that all speakers are securely
installed. This not only improves sound
quality, but also reduces the risk of
damage or injury resulting from speakers
being knocked over or falling in the event of
external shocks such as earthquakes.
fig. A fig. B fig. C
10 mm
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 18
Connecting your equipment 03
19
En
Installing your speaker system
At the very least, front left and right speakers only are necessary. Note that your main surround
speakers should always be connected as a pair, but you can connect just one surround back
speaker if you like (it must be connected to the left surround back terminal).
Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround connections
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R L
(Single)
R FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
AM
LOOP
FM
UNBAL
75
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN ANTENNA
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVD) (DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
B
A
AC IN
LINE LEVEL
INPUT
Front left
Subwoofer Center
VSX-1019AH
Surround right
Surround back right Surround back left
Front right
Surround left
The surround back terminals can also be
used for the Speaker B and ZONE 2.
7.1 ch surround setting
No connect Surround back
Speaker B setting
Speaker B - Left Speaker B - Right
ZONE 2 setting
ZONE 2 - Left ZONE 2 - Right
6.1 ch surround setting
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 19
Connecting your equipment 03
20
En
Bi-amping your speakers
Bi-amping is when you connect the high
frequency driver and low frequency driver of
your speakers to different amplifiers for better
crossover performance. Your speakers must be
bi-ampable to do this (having separate
terminals for high and low) and the sound
improvement will depend on the kind of
speakers youre using.
CAUTION
Most speakers with both High and Low
terminals have two metal plates that
connect the High to the Low terminals.
These must be removed when you are bi-
amping the speakers or you could severely
damage the amplifier. See your speaker
manual for more information.
If your speakers have a removable
crossover network, make sure you do not
remove it for bi-amping. Doing so may
damage your speakers.
Bi-wiring your speakers
Your speakers can also be bi-wired if they
support bi-amping.
With these connections, the Surr Back
System setting makes no difference.
To bi-wire a speaker, connect two speaker
cords to the speaker terminal on the receiver.

CAUTION
Dont connect different speakers from the
same terminal in this way.
When bi-wiring as well, heed the cautions
for bi-amping shown at the left.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R L
(Single)
R FRONT CENTER SURROUND SURROUND BACK /
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
AM
LOOP
FM
UNBAL
75
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN ANTENNA
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVD) (DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
B
A
AC IN
High
Low
High
Low
Front left
Subwoofer
Center
VSX-1019AH
Surround right
Front right
Surround left
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
Bi-amp compatible
speaker
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 20
Connecting your equipment 03
21
En
Selecting the Surr Back system
The surround back terminals can be used for
bi-amping, Speaker B and ZONE 2
connections, in addition to for the surround
back speakers. Make this setting according to
the application.
ZONE 2 setup
With these connections you can
simultaneously enjoy 5.1-channel surround
sound in the main zone with stereo playback
on another component in ZONE 2.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround
back speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections on page 19.
2 Select ZONE 2 from the Surr Back
System menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 93
to do this.
Speaker B setup
You can listen to stereo playback in another
room.
1 Connect a pair of speakers to the surround
back speaker terminals.
See Standard 5.1/6.1/7.1-channel surround
connections on page 19.
2 Select Speaker B from the Surr Back
System menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 93
to do this.
Bi-Amping setup
Bi-amping connection of the front speakers for
high sound quality with 5.1-channel surround
sound.
1 Connect a Bi-amp compatible speakers to
the front and surround back speaker
terminals.
See Bi-amping your speakers on page 20.
2 Select Front Bi-Amp from the Surr Back
System menu.
See Surround back speaker setting on page 93
to do this.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 21
Connecting your equipment 03
22
En
About the audio connection
There are several types of audio input and
output terminals on this receiver. The receiver
selects the first available signal in the following
order:
With an HDMI cable, video and audio
signals can be transferred in high quality
over a single cable.
CAUTION
When connecting optical cables, be careful
when inserting the plug not to damage the
shutter protecting the optical socket.
When storing optical cable, coil loosely.
The cable may be damaged if bent around
sharp corners.
About the video converter
The video converter ensures that all video
sources are output through all of the
MONITOR VIDEO OUT jacks. The only
exception is HDMI: since this resolution
cannot be downsampled, you must connect
your monitor/TV to the receivers HDMI video
outputs when connecting this video source.
1
If several video components are assigned to
the same input function (see The Input Setup
menu on page 39), the converter gives priority
to HDMI, component, then composite (in that
order).
Types of cables and
terminals
Transferable
audio signals

S
o
u
n
d

s
i
g
n
a
l

p
r
i
o
r
i
t
y

HDMI HD audio
Digital (Coaxial) Conventional
digital audio
Digital (Optical)
RCA (Analog)
(White/Red)
Conventional
analog audio
Note
1 If the video signal does not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the resolution settings on your
component or display. Note that some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not be
converted. In this case, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video options on page 66) OFF.
The signal input resolutions that can be converted from the component video input for the HDMI output are 480i/
576i, 480p/576p, 720p and 1080i. 1080p signals cannot be converted.
Only signals with an input resolution of 480i/576i can be converted from the component video input for the
composite monitor output.
HDMI IN
VIDEO IN
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
HDMI OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
Y PB PR Y PB PR
H
i
g
h

p
i
c
t
u
r
e

q
u
a
l
i
t
y
Terminal for
connection with
source device
Terminal for
connection with TV
monitor
Video signals can be output
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 22
Connecting your equipment 03
23
En
Connecting your TV and playback components
Connecting using HDMI
If you have an HDMI or DVI (with HDCP) equipped component (Blu-ray disc player, etc.), you can
connect it to this receiver using a commercially available HDMI cable.
If the TV and playback components support the Pioneer KURO LINK feature, the convenient KURO
LINK functions can be used (see KURO LINK on page 59).
When connecting a Blu-ray disc player,
connect the player to the receivers BD IN
terminal.
The HDMI indicator lights on the front
panel when an HDMI-equipped
component is connected.
For input components, connections other
than HDMI connections are also possible
(see Connecting your DVD player with no
HDMI output on page 25).
If your Blu-ray disc player offers multi-
channel analog audio outputs, see
Connecting the multichannel analog inputs
on page 28.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R FRONT CENTER SURROUND
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN
BD IN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVD) (DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
A
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT HDMI OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL ANALOG R L
AUDIO OUT
Other HDMI/DVI-
equipped component
HDMI/DVI-compatible
Blu-ray disc player
VSX-1019AH
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or flat screen TV
Select one
This connection is
required in order to
listen to the sound of
the TV over the receiver.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 23
Connecting your equipment 03
24
En
The sound of the TV cannot be heard over
the receiver if the TV is connected using an
HDMI cable.
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV
over the receiver, connect the receiver and
TV with audio cables.
About HDMI
1
The HDMI connection transfers
uncompressed digital video, as well as almost
every kind of digital audio that the connected
component is compatible with, including DVD-
Video, DVD-Audio, SACD, Dolby Digital Plus,
Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD Master Audio (see
below for limitations), Video CD/Super VCD
and CD. See About the video converter on
page 22 for more on HDMI compatibility.
This receiver incorporates High-Definition
Multimedia Interface (HDMI) technology.
This receiver supports the functions described
below through HDMI connections.
Digital transfer of uncompressed video
(contents protected by HDCP (1080p/24,
1080p/60, etc.))
DeepColor signal transfer
2
x.v.Color signal transfer
2
Input of multi-channel linear PCM digital
audio signals (192 kHz or less) for up to 8
channels
Input of the following digital audio formats:
Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS,
High bitrate audio (Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD
Master Audio), DVD-Audio, CD, SACD
(DSD signal), Video CD, Super VCD
Synchronized operation with components
using the KURO LINK function (see KURO
LINK on page 59)
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition
Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC.
x.v.Color and x.v.Color logo are trademarks of
Sony Corporation.
Note
1 An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High
Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a separate
adaptor (DVIHDMI) to do so. A DVI connection, however, does not support audio signals. Consult your local audio
dealer for more information.
If you connect a component that is not compatible with HDCP, an HDCP ERROR message is displayed on the front
panel display. Some components that are compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long
as there is no problem with displaying video this is not a malfunction.
Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
This receiver supports SACD, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master Audio. To take advantage of these
formats, however, make sure that the component connected to this receiver also supports the corresponding format.
2 Signal transfer is only possible when connected to a compatible component.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 24
Connecting your equipment 03
25
En
Connecting your DVD player with no HDMI output
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback
component with no HDMI output) to the receiver.
If you want to listen to the sound of the TV
over the receiver, connect the receiver and
TV with audio cables.
Component video should give superior
picture quality when compared to
composite. You can also take advantage of
progressive scan video (if your source and
TV are both compatible), which delivers a
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the
manuals that came with your TV and
source component to check whether they
are compatible with progressive-scan
video.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R FRONT CENTER SURROUND
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB
PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVD) (DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
A
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL ANALOG R L
AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT
Y PB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
HDMI IN
DVD player etc.
VSX-1019AH
HDMI/DVI-compatible monitor
or flat screen TV
Select one Select one
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 25
Connecting your equipment 03
26
En
Connecting your TV with no HDMI input
This diagram shows connections of a TV (with no HDMI input) and DVD player (or other playback
component) to the receiver.
With these connections, the picture is not output to the TV even if the DVD player is connected
with an HDMI cable. Connect the DVD players video signals using a composite or component
cord.
Connect using an HDMI cable to listen to
HD audio on the receiver. Do not use an
HDMI cable to input video signals.
Depending on the video component, it may
not be possible to output signals
connected by HDMI and other methods
simultaneously, and it may be necessary to
make output settings. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your
component for more information.
Component video should give superior
picture quality when compared to
composite. You can also take advantage of
progressive scan video (if your source and
TV are both compatible), which delivers a
very stable, flicker-free picture. See the
manuals that came with your TV and source
component to check whether they are
compatible with progressive-scan video.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R FRONT CENTER SURROUND
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVD) (DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
A
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
HDMI OUT
VIDEO IN
ANALOG R L
AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT
Y PB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
Y PB PR
COMPONENT VIDEO IN
DVD player etc. TV
VSX-1019AH
Select one
Select one Select one
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 26
Connecting your equipment 03
27
En
If your DVD player has multichannel
analog outputs, you can connect these
instead. See also see Connecting the
multichannel analog inputs on page 28.
The input functions below are assigned by
default to the receivers different input
terminals. Refer to The Input Setup menu
on page 39 to change the assignments if
other connections are used.
For example, the BD terminal is fixed to BD
input; no other audio signals can be input
to this terminal.
Connecting a satellite/cable
receiver or other set-top box
Satellite and cable receivers, and terrestrial
digital TV tuners are all examples of so-called
set-top boxes.
When you set up the receiver youll need to tell
the receiver which input you connected the set-
top box to (see The Input Setup menu on
page 39).
Input
function
Input Terminals
Digital HDMI Component
DVD
COAX-1
a
/COAX
b
a.VSX-1019AH model only.
b.VSX-919AH model only.
IN 1
BD (BD)
TV/SAT OPT-1
DVR OPT-2 IN 2
HDMI 1 (HDMI-1)
HDMI 2 (HDMI-2)
HDMI 3
a
(HDMI-3)
CD
COAX-2
a
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L R FRONT CENTER SUR
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OPTICAL
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVD) (DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN
3 1
A
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL ANALOG R L
AUDIO OUT
STB
VSX-1019AH
Select one
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 27
Connecting your equipment 03
28
En
Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder,
VCR and other video sources
This receiver has two sets of audio/video inputs
and outputs suitable for connecting analog or
digital video devices, including HDD/DVD
recorders and VCRs.
When you set up the receiver youll need to tell
the receiver which input you connected the
recorder to (see also The Input Setup menu on
page 39).
In order to record, you must connect the
analog audio cables (the digital connection
is for playback only).
Connecting the multichannel
analog inputs
For DVD Audio and SACD playback, your DVD
player may have 5.1 channel analog outputs.
Make sure that the player is set to output
multichannel analog audio.
If your player has 7.1-channel analog
outputs, the players surround back output
terminals are not used. Please refer to the
operating instructions supplied with your
component for more information.
E
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R FRONT CENTER SURROUND
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
NENT
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
PB
PR
Y
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD)
(DVR)
1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
A
ANALOG R L
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
ANALOG R L
AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
HDD/DVD recorder, VCR, etc.
VSX-1019AH
Select one
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R FRONT CENTER SURROUND
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
UDIO
OUT
L
R
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1 IN OUT 2 IN 3 IN (DVD) 1 IN (TV/SAT) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
A
R L
FRONT
OUTPUT
R L
SURROUND
OUTPUT
CENTER
OUTPUT
SUBWOOFER
OUTPUT
DVD player, etc.
VSX-1019AH
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 28
Connecting your equipment 03
29
En
Connecting other audio
components
This receiver has both digital and analog
inputs, allowing you to connect audio
components for playback.
This receiver features five stereo audio-only
inputs. One of these inputs have corresponding
outputs for use with audio recorders.
Most digital components also have analog
connections.
When you set up the receiver youll need to tell
the receiver which input you connected the
component to (see also The Input Setup menu
on page 39).
If your turntable has line-level outputs (i.e.,
it has a built-in phono pre-amp), connect it
to the CD inputs instead.
If youre connecting a recorder, connect
the analog audio outputs to the analog
audio inputs on the recorder.
About the WMA9 Pro decoder
This unit has an on-board Windows Media
Audio 9 Professional
1
(WMA9 Pro) decoder, so
it is possible to playback WMA9 Pro-encoded
audio using HDMI, coaxial or optical digital
connection when connected to a WMA9 Pro-
compatible player. However, the connected
DVD player, set-top box, etc. must be able to
output WMA9 Pro format audio signals
through a coaxial or optical digital output.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
DIGITAL
AUDIO
COAXIAL
SUBWOOFER SUBWOOFER CD-R CD
OUT IN
DVR
OUT IN
IR
R
L L R R FRONT CENTER SURROUND
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
SAT
FRONT CENTER SURROUND
OPTICAL
PREOUT
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT IN 3 IN (DVD) 1 IN (CD) 2 IN (DVR) 2
3 1
A
IN (TV/SAT) 1
ANALOG R L
AUDIO OUT DIGITAL OUT
COAXIAL OPTICAL
R L
AUDIO IN
REC
CD-R, MD, DAT, etc.
VSX-1019AH
Select one
Note
1 Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
With WMA9 Pro, sound problems may occur depending on your computer system. Note that WMA9 Pro 96 kHz
sources will be downsampled to 48 kHz.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 29
Connecting your equipment 03
30
En
Connecting AM/FM antennas
Connect the AM loop antenna and the FM wire
antenna as shown below. To improve reception
and sound quality, connect external antennas
(see Connecting external antennas below).
1 Pull off the protective shields of both AM
antenna wires.
2 Push open the tabs, then insert one wire
fully into each terminal, then release the tabs
to secure the AM antenna wires.
3 Fix the AM loop antenna to the attached
stand.
To fix the stand to the antenna, bend in the
direction indicated by the arrow (fig. a) then
clip the loop onto the stand (fig. b).
If you plan to mount the AM antenna to a
wall or other surface, secure the stand with
screws (fig. c) before clipping the loop to
the stand. Make sure the reception is clear.
4 Place the AM antenna on a flat surface
and in a direction giving the best reception.
5 Connect the FM wire antenna in the same
way as the AM loop antenna.
For best results, extend the FM antenna fully
and fix to a wall or door frame. Dont drape
loosely or leave coiled up.
Connecting external antennas
To improve FM reception connect an external
FM antenna to the FM UNBAL 75 .
To improve AM reception, connect a 5 m to 6 m
length of vinyl-coated wire to the AM LOOP
terminals without disconnecting the supplied
AM loop antenna.
For the best possible reception, suspend
horizontally outdoors.
AM
LOOP
FM
UNBAL
75
ANTENNA
3
1
2
4
5
fg. a fg. b fg. c
AM
LOOP
FM
UNBAL
75
ANTENNA
75 coaxial cable
AM
LOOP
FM
UNBAL
75
ANTENNA
Outdoor
antenna
5 m to 6 m
Indoor antenna
(vinyl-coated wire)
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 30
Connecting your equipment 03
31
En
MULTI-ZONE setup
This receiver can power up to two independent
systems in separate rooms after you have
made the proper MULTI-ZONE connections.
Different sources can be playing in two zones
at the same time or, depending on your needs,
the same source can also be used. The main
and sub zone have independent power (the
main zone power can be off while sub zone is
on) and the sub zone can be controlled by the
remote or front panel controls. However, you
may need to specify the volume settings in
ZONE Audio Setup on page 98.
Making MULTI-ZONE connections
It is possible to make these connections if you
have a separate TV and speakers for the sub
zone (ZONE 2). You will also need a separate
amplifier if you are not using the MULTI-ZONE
setup using speaker terminals (ZONE 2) below
for the sub zone.
MULTI-ZONE listening options
The following table shows the signals that can
be output to ZONE 2:
Basic MULTI-ZONE setup (ZONE 2)
Connect a separate amplifier to the AUDIO
ZONE 2 OUT jacks and a TV monitor to the
VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT jack, both on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to
the sub zone amplifier as shown in the
following illustration.
MULTI-ZONE setup using speaker
terminals (ZONE 2)
You must select ZONE 2 in Surround back
speaker setting on page 93 to use this setup.
Note that the sound in the sub zone will be
temporarily interrupted when controlling the
main zone (for example, changing the input
function or starting playback).
Connect a TV monitor to the VIDEO ZONE
2 OUT jacks on this receiver.
You should have a pair of speakers attached to
the surround back speaker terminals as shown
below.
Sub Zone Input functions available
ZONE 2 Analog audio signals (AUDIO ZONE 2
OUT).
a
With video signals,
b
the composite
video (VIDEO ZONE 2 OUT) signals
can be output.
a.Any analog signal. (This does not apply for the MULTI
CH IN input.)
b.JPEG files cannot be played with the USB input.
ASSIGNABLE
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
BDIN IN 1
IN 1 IN 2
(DVD) (DVR)
R L
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
Main zone Sub zone
VSX-1019AH
ASSIGNABLE
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
T ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
BDIN IN 1
IN 1 IN 2
IN
(DVD) (DVR)
OOFER
L L
(Single)
R ND SURROUNDBACK/
AM
LOO
FM
UN
75
OUT
VR)
B
VIDEO IN
R L
Main zone Sub zone
VSX-1019AH
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 31
Connecting your equipment 03
32
En
Connecting an IR receiver
If you keep your stereo components in a closed
cabinet or shelving unit, or you wish to use the
sub zone remote control in another zone, you
can use an optional IR receiver (such as a Niles
or Xantech unit) to control your system instead
of the remote sensor on the front panel of this
receiver.
1

1 Connect the IR receiver sensor to the IR IN
jack on the rear of this receiver.
2 Connect the IR IN jack of another
component to the IR OUT jack on the rear of
this receiver to link it to the IR receiver.
Please see the manual supplied with your IR
receiver for the type of cable necessary for the
connection.
If you want to link a Pioneer component to
the IR receiver, see Operating other Pioneer
components with this units sensor below
to connect to the CONTROL jacks instead
of the IR OUT jack.
Operating other Pioneer
components with this units
sensor
Many Pioneer components have SR CONTROL
jacks which can be used to link components
together so that you can use just the remote
sensor of one component. When you use a
remote control, the control signal is passed
along the chain to the appropriate component.
2
Important
Note that if you use this feature, make sure
that you also have at least one set of analog
audio, video or HDMI jacks connected to
another component for grounding purposes.
1 Decide which component you want to use
the remote sensor of.
When you want to control any component in
the chain, this is the remote sensor at which
youll point the corresponding remote control.
Note
1 Remote operation may not be possible if direct light from a strong fluorescent lamp is shining on the IR receiver
remote sensor window.
Note that other manufacturers may not use the IR terminology. Refer to the manual that came with your component
to check for IR compatibility.
If using two remote controls (at the same time), the IR receivers remote sensor takes priority over the remote sensor
on the front panel.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
HDMI
CD DVR
OUT IN
IR
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
SP
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3
(DVD) (DVR)
3 1
A
IN
IR
IN OUT
CONTROL
IR receiver
Closet or shelving unit
Non-Pioneer
component
Pioneer
component
VSX-1019AH
2 If you want to control all your components using this receivers remote control, see Setting the remote to control
other components on page 72.
If you have connected a remote control to the CONTROL IN jack (using a mini-plug cable), you wont be able to
control this unit using the remote sensor.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 32
Connecting your equipment 03
33
En
2 Connect the CONTROL OUT jack of that
component to the CONTROL IN jack of
another Pioneer component.
Use a cable with a mono mini-plug on each
end for the connection.
Continue the chain in the same way for as
many components as you have.
Connecting a component to the
front panel inputs
The front panel inputs comprise a composite
video jack (VIDEO) and stereo analog audio
inputs (AUDIO L/R). You can use these
connections for any kind of audio/video
component, but they are especially convenient
for portable equipment such as camcorders,
video games and portable audio/video
equipment.
Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the front panel inputs.
Select these inputs using INPUT SELECT
(remote) or the INPUT SELECTOR dial
(front panel) to select VIDEO.
ASSIGNABLE
ASSIGNABLE
HDM
CD DVR
OUT IN
IR
CON-
TROL
IN
AUX
IN
DVD
IN
MONITOR
OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
TV/SAT
IN
ZONE2
AUDIO
OUT
L
Y
PB PB
PR
Y
PB
PR
PR
Y
R
SP
BDIN IN
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
1
IN 1 IN 2
IN OUT 2 IN 3
(DVD) (DVR)
3 1
A
CONTROL
IN OUT IN OUT
CONTROL
VSX-1019AH
MASTER
VOLUME
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SPEAKERS
VIDEO L R AUDIO
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON /OFF
VIDEO INPUT
AUDIO VIDEO
OUTPUT
VIDEO INPUT
R L AUDIO VIDEO
iPod
iPhone
USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USB
iPod
iPhone
This receiver
TV game, video camera,
etc.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 33
Connecting your equipment 03
34
En
Connecting an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal
that will allow you to control playback of audio
content from your iPod using the controls of
this receiver.
Switch the receiver into standby then use
the supplied iPod cable to connect your iPod
to the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal on the front
panel of this receiver.
Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.
It is also possible to connect using the
cable included with the iPod, but in this
case it is not possible to view pictures via
the receiver.
For the cable connection, refer to also the
operating instructions for iPod.

Connecting a USB device
It is possible to playback files using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.
Switch the receiver into standby then
connect your USB device to the iPod/iPhone/
USB terminal on the front panel of this
receiver.
Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the iPod/iPhone/USB terminal.
MENU


MASTER
VOLUME
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SPEAKERS
VIDEO L R AUDIO
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON /OFF
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
R L AUDIO VIDEO USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USB
iPod
iPhone
iPod
iPhone
iPod
iPod cable
(supplied)
This receiver
MASTER
VOLUME
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SPEAKERS
VIDEO L R AUDIO
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON /OFF
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
R L AUDIO VIDEO USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USB
iPod
iPhone
iPod
iPhone
USB mass
storage device
This receiver
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 34
Connecting your equipment 03
35
En
Plugging in the receiver
Only plug in after you have connected all your
components to this receiver, including the
speakers.
1 Plug the supplied power cord into the AC
IN socket on the back of the receiver.
2 Plug the other end into a power outlet.
1
CAUTION
Handle the power cord by the plug part. Do
not pull out the plug by tugging the cord,
and never touch the power cord when your
hands are wet, as this could cause a short
circuit or electric shock. Do not place the
unit, a piece of furniture, or other object on
the power cord or pinch the cord in any
other way. Never make a knot in the cord or
tie it with other cables. The power cords
should be routed so that they are not likely
to be stepped on. A damaged power cord
can cause a fire or give you an electric
shock. Check the power cord once in a
while. If you find it damaged, ask your
nearest Pioneer authorized independent
service company for a replacement.
Do not use any power cord other than the
one supplied with this unit.
Do not use the supplied power cord for any
purpose other than that described below.
The receiver should be disconnected by
removing the mains plug from the wall
socket when not in regular use, e.g., when
on vacation.
Make sure the blue C STANDBY/ON light
has gone out before unplugging.
If you have connected speakers with a 6
impedance, change the impedance setting
before turning on the power.
Note
1 After this receiver is connected to an AC outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI initialization process begins. You
cannot carry out any operations during this process. The HDMI indicator in the front panel display blinks during this
process, and you can turn on this receiver once it has stopped blinking. When you set the KURO LINK mode to OFF,
you can skip this process. For details about the KURO LINK feature, see KURO LINK on page 59.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 35
Basic Setup 04
36
En
Chapter 4:
Basic Setup
Switching the speaker impedance
We recommend using speakers of 8 with this
system, but it is possible to switch the
impedance setting if you plan to use speakers
with a 6 impedance rating.
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
2 While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press C STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET < NO >.
Use TUNE +/ (or / on the remote control)
to select SPEAKER < 8 >, and then use
PRESET +/ (or / on the remote control) to
select SPEAKER 8 or SPEAKER 6.
SPEAKER 8 Use this setting if your
speakers are rated at 8 or more.
SPEAKER 6 Use this setting if your
speakers are rated at 6 .
Changing the OSD display
language (OSD Language)
The language used on the Graphical User
Interface screen can be changed.
The explanations in these operating
instructions are for when English is
selected for the GUI screen.
1 Press on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to exit the
current menu.
2 Select System Setup from the HOME
MENU.
3 Select OSD Language from the System
Setup menu.
4 Select the desired language.
English
French
German
Italian
Spanish
Dutch
Russian
5 Select OK to change the language.
The setting is completed and the System Setup
menu reappears automatically.
RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
a.Manual SP Set up
b. Input Set up
c. OSD Language
d. Ot her Set up
4.SystemSetup
4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Language : Engl i sh
OK
4c.OSD Language
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Language : Engl i sh
OK
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 36
Basic Setup 04
37
En
Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC)
The Auto MCACC Setup measures the
acoustic characteristics of your listening area,
taking into account ambient noise, speaker
connection and speaker size, and tests for both
channel delay and channel level. After you
have set up the microphone provided with your
system, the receiver uses the information from
a series of test tones to optimize the speaker
settings and equalization for your particular
room.
Make sure you do this before moving on to
Playing a source on page 41.
Important
Make sure the microphone and speakers
are not moved during the Auto MCACC
Setup.
Using the Auto MCACC Setup will
overwrite any existing settings for the
MCACC preset you select.
Before using the Auto MCACC Setup, the
headphones should be disconnected and
the iPod/USB function should not be
selected as an input function.
CAUTION
The test tones used in the Auto MCACC
Setup are output at high volume.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
2 Connect the microphone to the MCACC
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.
Place the microphone so that its about ear level
at your normal listening position (use a tripod if
possible). Make sure there are no obstacles
between the speakers and the microphone.
The Full Auto MCACC display appears once the
microphone is connected.
1
3 Select Surr Back System setting,
2
select
an MCACC preset
3
, press and then
select START.
4
Note
1 You cant use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB input function is selected (in either the main or sub zone).
When you set ZONE 2 to ON (page 68), you cant use the HOME MENU.
If you leave the GUI screen for over five minutes, the screen saver will appear.
2 If you are planning on bi-amping your front speakers, or setting up a separate speaker system in another room, read
through Surround back speaker setting on page 93 and make sure to connect your speakers as necessary before
continuing to step 4.
If you have THX-certified speakers, select Return, then select Auto MCACC for the THX Speaker setting. See
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 77 for more on this.
3 The six MCACC presets are used for storing surround sound settings for different listening positions. Simply choose
an unused preset for now (you can rename it later in Data Management on page 90).
4 Note that correction curves are saved only when set to SYMMETRY. Select Return, then select Auto MCACC to save
other correction curves (such as ALL CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN). See Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 77 for
more on this.
MASTER
VOLUME
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SPEAKERS
VIDEO L R AUDIO
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON /OFF
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
R L AUDIO VIDEO USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USB
iPod
iPhone
iPod
iPhone
Surr Back System : Normal
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
START
Save SYMMETRY to : M1.MEMORY 1
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 37
Basic Setup 04
38
En
Select Normal (Surround back), Speaker B,
Front Bi-Amp or ZONE 2 for the Surr Back
System setting according to connections to
the surround back speaker terminals.
4 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected, and if
youre using a subwoofer, make sure it is switched
on and set to a comfortable volume level.
5 Wait for the test tones to finish, then
confirm the speaker configuration in the GUI
screen.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs test tones to determine the
speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
quiet as possible while its doing this.
1
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds
while the speaker configuration check screen
is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will
resume automatically. In this case, you dont
need to select OK and press ENTER in step 6.
With error messages (such as Too much
ambient noise! or Check microphone.)
select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup below) and verifying the mic
connection. If there doesnt seem to be a
problem, you can simply select GO NEXT
and continue.
The configuration shown on-screen should
reflect the actual speakers you have.
If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isnt correct), there
may be a problem with the speaker
connection.
If selecting RETRY doesnt work, turn off
the power and check the speaker
connections. If there doesnt seem to be a
problem, you can simply use / to select
the speaker and / to change the
setting and continue.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the
speakers wiring (+ and ) may be inverted.
Check the speaker connections.
2
If the connections were wrong, turn off the
power, disconnect the power cord, then
reconnect properly. After this, perform the
Full Auto MCACC procedure again.
6 Make sure OK is selected, then press
ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs more test tones to
determine the optimum receiver settings for
Channel Level, Speaker Distance, Standing
Wave and Acoustic Cal EQ.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this
is happening. It may take 3 to 10 minutes.
Note
1 Do not adjust the volume during the test tones. This may result in incorrect speaker settings.
Now Anal yzi ng... 2/10
Envi ronment Check
1a.Full Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
Ambi ent Noi se : OK
Mi crophone :
Speaker YES/NO :
L : YES
R : YES
C : YES
1a.Full Auto MCACC
SR : YES
SBR : YES
SBL : YES
SL : YES
SW : YES
10
OK RETRY
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly
connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 38
Basic Setup 04
39
En
7 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is
completed and the Home Menu menu
reappears automatically.
1
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from
this receiver upon completion of the Auto
MCACC Setup.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
should give you excellent surround sound from
your system, but it is also possible to adjust
these settings manually using The Advanced
MCACC menu on page 76 or The system and
the other setup on page 92.
2
Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup
If the room environment is not optimal for the
Auto MCACC Setup (too much background
noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking
the speakers from the microphone) the final
settings may be incorrect. Check for household
appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.),
that may be affecting the environment and
switch them off if necessary. If there are any
instructions showing in the front panel display,
please follow them.
Some older TVs may interfere with the
operation of the microphone. If this seems
to be happening, switch off the TV when
doing the Auto MCACC Setup.
The Input Setup menu
You only need to make settings in the Input
Setup menu if you didnt hook up your digital
equipment according to the default settings
(see Input function default and possible
settings on page 40). In this case, you need to
tell the receiver what equipment is hooked up
to which terminal so the buttons on the remote
control correspond to the components youve
connected.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use C RECEIVER to switch on.
2 Press on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
3 Select System Setup from the HOME
MENU.
4 Select Input Setup from the System
Setup menu.
5 Select the input function that you want to
set up.
The default names correspond with the names
next to the terminals on the rear panel (such as
DVD or VIDEO) which, in turn, correspond
with the names on the remote control.
Note
1 You can also choose to view the settings from the MCACC Data Check screen. See Checking MCACC Data on page 88
for more on this.
2 Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will
end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 93.
The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.
RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
a.Manual SP Set up
b. Input Set up
c. OSD Language
d. Ot her Set up
4.SystemSetup
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
INPUT : DVD
Input Name : Rename
Di gi tal In : COAX-1
HDMI Input : ---
Input Ski p : OFF
Component In : Comp-1
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 39
Basic Setup 04
40
En
6 Select the input(s) to which youve
connected your component.
For example, if your DVD player only has an
optical output, you will need to change the
DVD input functions Digital In setting from
COAX-1 (VSX-1019AH model)/COAX (VSX-
919AH model) (default) to the optical input
youve connected it to. The numbering (OPT-1
to 2) corresponds with the numbers beside the
inputs on the back of the receiver.
If your component is connected via a
component video cable to an input
terminal other than the default, you must
tell the receiver which input terminal your
component is connected to, or else you
may see the composite video signals
instead of the component video signals.
1
7 When youre finished, proceed to the
settings for other inputs.
There are three optional settings in addition to
the assignment of the input jacks:
Input Name You can choose to rename
the input function for easier identification.
Select Rename to do so, or Default to
return to the system default.
Input Skip When set to ON, that input is
skipped when selecting the input using
INPUT SELECT. (DVD and other inputs can
be still be selected directly with the input
function buttons.)
8 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the System Setup menu.
Input function default and possible
settings
The terminals on the receiver generally
correspond to the name of one of the input
functions. If you have connected components
to this receiver differently from (or in addition
to) the defaults below, see The Input Setup
menu on page 39 to tell the receiver how youve
connected up. The dots (&) indicate possible
assignments.
Note
1 For high-definition video (using component video connections), or when digital video conversion is switched off (in
Setting the Video options on page 66), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video cable as
you used to connect your video component.
4b.Input Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
INPUT : DVD
Input Name : Rename
Di gi tal In : COAX-1
HDMI Input : ---
Input Ski p : OFF
Component In : Comp-1
Input
function
Input Terminals
Digital HDMI Component
DVD COAX-1
a
/COAX
b
a.VSX-1019AH model only.
b.VSX-919AH model only.
&
c
c.With KURO LINK set to ON, assignments cannot be
made (see KURO LINK on page 59).
IN 1
BD (BD)
TV/SAT OPT-1 &
c
&
DVR OPT-2 &
c
IN 2
VIDEO
HDMI 1 (HDMI-1)
HDMI 2 (HDMI-2)
HDMI 3
a
(HDMI-3)
iPod/USB
CD COAX-2
a
CD-R/TAPE &
TUNER
AUX &
MULTI CH IN &
c
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 40
Basic playback 05
41
En
Chapter 5:
Basic playback
Playing a source
Here are the basic instructions for playing a
source (such as a DVD disc) with your home
theater system.
1 Switch on your system components and
receiver.
Start by switching on the playback component
(for example a DVD player), your TV
1
and
subwoofer (if you have one), then the receiver
(press C RECEIVER).
Make sure the setup microphone is
disconnected.
2 Select the input function you want to
play.
You can use the input function buttons on the
remote control, INPUT SELECT, or the front
panel INPUT SELECTOR dial.
2
3 Press , then press AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT (AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to
select AUTO SURROUND and start playback
of the source.
3
If youre playing a Dolby Digital or DTS surround
sound DVD disc, you should hear surround
sound. If you are playing a stereo source, you
will only hear sound from the front left/right
speakers in the default listening mode.
See also Listening to your system on
page 52 for information on different ways
of listening to sources.
It is possible to check on the front panel display
whether or not multi-channel playback is being
performed properly.
When using a surround back speaker,
2D+PLIIx MOVIE is displayed when playing
Dolby Digital signals, and DTS+Neo:6 is
displayed when playing DTS 5.1-channel signals.
When not using a surround back speaker,
DOLBY DIGITAL is displayed when playing
Dolby Digital signals.
If the display does not correspond to the input
signal and listening mode, check the
connections and settings.
4 Use the volume control to adjust the
volume level.
Turn down the volume of your TV so that all
sound is coming from the speakers connected
to this receiver.
Note
1 Make sure that the TVs video input is set to this receiver (for example, if you connected this receiver to the VIDEO
jacks on your TV, make sure that the VIDEO input is now selected).
2 If you need to manually switch the input signal type press SIGNAL SEL (page 57).
3 You may need to check the digital audio output settings on your DVD player or digital satellite receiver. It should be
set to output Dolby Digital, DTS and 88.2 kHz / 96 kHz PCM (2 channel) audio, and if there is an MPEG audio option,
set this to convert the MPEG audio to PCM.
Depending on your DVD player or source discs, you may only get digital 2 channel stereo and analog sound. In this
case, the receiver must be set to a multichannel listening mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 52 if you
need to do this) if you want multichannel surround sound.
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 41
Basic playback 05
42
En
Playing a source with HDMI
connection
Use INPUT SELECT to select the HDMI
input youve connected to (for example,
HDMI 1).
You can also perform the same operation by
using the INPUT SELECTOR dial on the front
panel or by pressing HDMI on the remote
control repeatedly.
Set the HDMI parameter in Setting the
Audio options on page 63 to THROUGH if
you want to hear HDMI audio output from
your TV or flat screen TV (no sound will be
heard from this receiver).
If the video signal does not appear on your
TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the
resolution settings on your component or
display. Note that some components (such
as video game units) have resolutions that
may not be converted. In this case, use an
analog video connection.
Selecting the multichannel analog
inputs
If you have connected a decoder or a DVD
player as above, you must select the analog
multichannel inputs for surround sound
playback.
1
1 Make sure you have set the playback
source to the proper output setting.
For example, you might need to set your DVD
player to output multichannel analog audio.
2 Use INPUT SELECT to select MULTI CH IN.
You can also use the INPUT SELECTOR dial on
the front panel.
Depending on the DVD player youre using,
the analog output level of the subwoofer
channel may be too low. In this case, the
output level of the subwoofer can be
increased by 10 dB in the Multi Ch In
Setup in Other Setup. For details, see
Multi Channel Input Setup on page 98.
Playing an iPod
This receiver has a dedicated iPod terminal
that will allow you to control playback of audio
content from your iPod using the controls of
this receiver.
2
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting an iPod on page 34.
Note
1 When playback from the multichannel inputs is selected, only the volume and channel levels can be set.
You cant listen to your speaker B system during playback from the multichannel inputs.
With MULTI CH IN inputs, it is possible to play pictures simultaneously. For details, see Multi Channel Input Setup
on page 98.
2 This system is compatible with the audio and video of the iPod nano, iPod fifth generation (audio only), iPod classic,
iPod touch and iPhone. However, some of the functions may be restricted for some models. The system is not
compatible with the iPod shuffle.
Compatibility may vary depending on the software version of your iPod and iPhone. Please be sure to use the latest
available software version.
iPod and iPhone are licensed for reproduction of non-copyrighted materials or materials the user is legally permitted
to reproduce.
Features such as the equalizer cannot be controlled using this receiver, and we recommend switching the equalizer
off before connecting.
Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any
inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from the iPod failure.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 42
Basic playback 05
43
En
2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to
switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
Loading appears in the GUI screen while the
receiver verifies the connection and retrieves
data from the iPod.
When the display shows iPod top menu youre
ready to play music from the iPod.
1
Main Zone:
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Playing back audio files stored on an
iPod
To navigate songs on your iPod, you can take
advantage of the GUI screen of your TV
connected to this receiver.
2
You can also
control all operations for music in the front
panel display of this receiver.
Finding what you want to play
When your iPod is connected to this receiver,
you can browse songs stored on your iPod by
playlist, artist name, album name, song name,
genre or composer, similar to using your iPod
directly.
1 Use / to select a category, then press
ENTER to browse that category.
To return to the previous level any time,
press RETURN.
2 Use / to browse the selected category
(e.g., albums).
Use / to move to previous/next levels.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press > to start
playback.
3
Main Zone:
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Note
1 The controls of your iPod will be inoperable when connected to this receiver.
VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB function cannot be selected for the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 68).
2 Note that characters that cannot be displayed on this receiver are displayed as #.
This feature is not available for photos or video clips on your iPod. To display video clips, switch iPod operation to
the iPod (see Switching the iPod controls on page 44).
iPod
iPod CTRL
Pl ayl i st s
Ar t i st s
Al bums
Songs
Podcast s
Genr es
Composer s
Audi obooks
1 / 9
A/V RECEIVER
iPod

[ Playlists ]
[ Artists ]
[ Albums ]
[ Songs ]
[ Podcasts ]
[ Genres ]
[ Composers ]
[ Audiobooks ]
1/9
3 If youre in the song category, you can also press ENTER to start playback.
Play mode
Track title
Album title
Artist name
Track Title
Artist Name
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Chapter Number : xxx/xxx
xxxx/xxxx
Now Playing
Album Title
iPod
iPod CTRL
Top Menu
Li st
Shuf f l e On
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Playing time
File information
Track number
Track Title
Shuffle On

3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Album Title
Play xxxx/xxxx
Chap xxx/xxx
Play mode
Track title
Album title
Artist name
Playing time
File information
Track number
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 43
Basic playback 05
44
En
Navigation through categories on your iPod
looks like this:
Playlists Songs
Artists Albums Songs
Albums Songs
Songs
Podcasts
Genres Artists Albums Songs
Composers Albums Songs
Audiobooks
Shuffle Songs
Tip
You can play all of the songs in a particular
category by selecting the All item at the top
of each category list. For example, you can
play all the songs by a particular artist.
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback
controls for your iPod. Press iPod USB to
switch the remote control to the iPod/USB
operation mode.
Switching the iPod controls
1
You can switch over the iPod controls between
the iPod and the receiver.
1 Press iPod CTRL to switch the iPod
controls.
2
This enables operation and display on your
iPod, and this receivers remote control and
GUI screen become inactive.
2 Press iPod CTRL again to switch back to
the receiver controls.
Button What it does
> Press to start playback.
If you start playback when something
other than a song is selected, all the
songs that fall into that category will play.
H Pauses/unpauses playback.
/> Press and hold during playback to start
scanning.
m/> Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Repeat One, Repeat All and Repeat Off.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Shuffle Songs, Shuffle Albums and
Shuffle Off.
DISP Press repeatedly to change the song
playback information displayed in the
front panel display.
ENTER When browsing, press to move to next
levels. During playback, press to set the
play and pause modes.
RETURN When browsing, press to move to
previous levels.
/ When browsing, press to move to
previous/next levels.
/ During Audiobook playback, press to
switch the playback speed: Faster
Normal Slower
TOP
MENU
Press to return to the iPod top menu
screen.
Note
1 You cannot use this function, when an iPod of fifth generation or iPod nano of first generation is connected.
2 When this function is set, iPod images cannot be played on this receiver. However, when video clips recorded on the
iPod are played, the playback picture is displayed.
Button What it does
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 44
Basic playback 05
45
En
Playing a USB device
It is possible to playback files
1
using the USB
interface on the front of this receiver.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
See Connecting a USB device on page 34.
2
2 Press iPod USB on the remote control to
switch the receiver to the iPod/USB.
Loading appears in the GUI screen as this
receiver starts recognizing the USB device
connected.
3
When the display shows USB Top
menu youre ready to playback from the USB
device.
Main Zone:
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Important
If an Over Current message lights in the
display, the power requirements of the USB
device are too high for this receiver. Try
following the points below:
Switch the receiver off, then on again.
Reconnect the USB device with the
receiver switched off.
Use a dedicated AC adapter (supplied with
the device) for USB power.
If this doesnt remedy the problem, it is likely
your USB device is incompatible.
Playing back audio files stored on a
USB memory device
The maximum number of levels that you can
select in Step 2 (below) is 8. Also, you can
display and play back up to 30 000 folders and
files within a USB memory device.
4
Note
1 Compatible USB devices include external magnetic hard drives, portable flash memory (particularly keydrives) and
digital audio players (MP3 players) of format FAT16/32. It is not possible to connect this unit to a personal computer
for USB playback.
Pioneer cannot guarantee compatibility (operation and/or bus power) with all USB mass storage devices and
assumes no responsibility for any loss of data that may occur when connected to this receiver.
2 Make sure the receiver is in standby when disconnecting the USB device.
3 If the file selected cannot be played back, this receiver automatically skips to the next file playable.
When the file currently being played back has no title assigned to it, the file name is displayed in the GUI screen
instead; when neither the album name nor the artist name is present, the row is displayed as a blank space.
Note that non-roman characters in the playlist are displayed as #.
VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB function cannot be selected for the MULTI-ZONE feature (page 68).
If this error occurs, playback is interrupted and the next playable file is played automatically.
This error may occur if the title information is changed on a computer, etc.
USB Top
Musi c
Phot os
Sl i deshow Set up
1 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
USB Top

[ Music ]
[ Photos ]
[ Slideshow Setup ]
1/3
4 Playback stops when the last song in a USB memory device is played back to the end.
When a USB memory device with a large capacity is connected, it may take some time to read all the contents.
This receiver does not support a USB hub.
Copyrighted audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
DRM-protected audio files cannot be played back on this receiver.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 45
Basic playback 05
46
En
1 Use / to select Music from the USB
Top menu.
2 Use / to select a folder, then press
ENTER to browse that folder.
To return to the previous level any time,
press RETURN.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press > to start
playback.
Main Zone:
Sub Zone (VSX-1019AH model only):
Basic playback controls
The following table shows the basic playback
controls for your USB memory device. Press
iPod USB to switch the remote control to the
iPod/USB operation mode.
USB Top
Musi c
Phot os
Sl i deshow Set up
1 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
Music
Return
Fol der 1
Fol der 2
Fol der 3
Musi c1
Musi c2
Musi c3
Musi c4
Musi c5
1 / 9
A/V RECEIVER
Top Menu
Track Title
USB
Top Menu
Ret ur n
Random On
PLAY 3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Now Playing
Album Title
Genre : xxxxxxxxxxx
Format : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bit Rate : xxxxxxxxxxx
xxxx/xxxx
Play mode
Track title or File name
Album title or Folder
name
Artist name
Playing time
File information
Track number
Track Title
Random On

3:02 -2:02
Artist Name
Album Title
Play xxxx/xxxx
Play mode
Track title or File name
Album title or Folder
name
Artist name
Playing time
Track number
Button What it does
> Press to start playback.
H Pauses/unpauses playback.
/> Press and hold during playback to start
scanning.
m/> Press to skip to previous/next track.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Repeat One, Repeat Folder, Repeat All
and Repeat Off.
Press repeatedly to switch between
Random On and Random Off.
DISP Press repeatedly to change the song
playback information displayed in the
front panel display.
ENTER When browsing, press to move to next
levels. During playback, press to set the
play and pause modes.
RETURN When browsing, press to move to
previous levels.
/ When browsing, press to move to
previous/next levels.
TOP
MENU
Press to return to the USB Top menu.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 46
Basic playback 05
47
En
Playing back photo files stored on a
USB memory device
1
1 Use / to select Photos from the USB
Top menu.
2 Use / to select a folder, then press
ENTER to browse that folder.
To return to the previous level any time, press
RETURN.
3 Continue browsing until you arrive at
what you want to play, then press > to start
playback.
2
The selected content is displayed in full screen
and starts a slideshow.
After a slideshow launches, pressing ENTER
toggles between play and pause.
Basic playback controls
Slideshow Setup
Make the various settings for playing
slideshows of photo files here.
1 Use / to select Slideshow Setup
from the USB Top menu.
2 Select the setting you want.
Theme Add various effects to the
slideshow.
Interval Set the interval for switching the
photos. This may not be available
depending on the Theme setting.
BGM Play music files stored on the USB
device while displaying photos.
Music Select Select the folder containing
the music files to be played when BGM is
set to ON.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the USB Top menu.
Note
1 VSX-1019AH model only: Photo files cannot be played in the sub zone.
2 If the slideshow is left in the pause mode for five minutes, the list screen reappears.
Button(s) Function
ENTER, > Starts displaying a photo and playing a
slideshow.
RETURN,

Stops the Player and returns to the


previous menu.
m Displays the previous photo content
> Display the next photo content
H Pauses/unpauses the slideshow
USB Top
Musi c
Phot os
Sl i deshow Set up
1 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
USB Top
Return
Musi c
Phot os
Sl i deshow Set up
1 / 3
A/V RECEIVER
Slideshow Setup
Return
A/V RECEIVER
Top Menu
Theme : Normal (OFF)
Interval : 5 sec
BGM : ON
Musi c Sel ect : Sel ect
Fol der1
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 47
Basic playback 05
48
En
About playable file formats
The USB function of this receiver supports the following file formats. Note that some file formats are not
available for playback although they are listed as playable file formats.
Music files
Photo files
Category Extension Stream
MP3
a
a.MPEG Layer-3 audio decoding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson multimedia.
.mp3 MPEG-1, 2, 2.5 Audio
Layer-3
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
WAV .wav LPCM Sampling frequency 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 8 bit, 16 bit
Channel 2 ch, Monaural
WMA .wma
WMA8/9
b
b.Files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported;
specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice.
Sampling frequency 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Quantization bitrate 16 bit
Channel 2 ch
Bitrate 8 kbps to 320 kbps
VBR/CBR Supported/Supported
Category Extension
JPEG .jpg
.jpeg
.jpe
.jif
.jfif
Format Meeting the following conditions:
Baseline JPEG format (including files recorded in Exif/DCF
format)
Y:Cb:Cr - 4:4:4, 4:2:2 or 4:2:0
Resolution 30 to 8192 pixels vertical, 40 to 8192 pixels horizontal
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 48
Basic playback 05
49
En
Listening to the radio
The following steps show you how to tune in to
FM and AM radio broadcasts using the
automatic (search) and manual (step) tuning
functions. If you already know the frequency of
the station you want, see Tuning directly to a
station below. Once you are tuned to a station
you can memorize the frequency for recall
latersee Saving station presets on page 50
for more on how to do this.
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM),
if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and
AM.
3 Tune to a station.
There are three ways to do this:
Automatic tuning To search for stations
in the currently selected band, press and
hold TUNE / for about a second. The
receiver will start searching for the next
station, stopping when it has found one.
Repeat to search for other stations.
Manual tuning To change the frequency
one step at a time, press TUNE /.
High speed tuning Press and hold
TUNE / for high speed tuning. Release
the button at the frequency you want.
Improving FM sound
If the TUNED or STEREO indicator doesnt light
when tuning to an FM station because the
signal is weak, press MPX to switch the
receiver into mono reception mode. This
should improve the sound quality and allow
you to enjoy the broadcast.
Using Neural THX
This feature uses Neural Surround, THX


technologies to achieve optimal surround
sound from FM radio.
While listening to FM radio, press AUTO/
ALC/DIRECT for Neural THX listening.
See About Neural THX Surround on page 113
for more on this.
The Neural THX mode can be selected also
with STANDARD.
Tuning directly to a station
Sometimes, youll already know the frequency of
the station you want to listen to. In this case, you
can simply enter the frequency directly using
the number buttons on the remote control.
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Use BAND to change the band (FM or AM),
if necessary.
Each press switches the band between FM and
AM.
3 Press D.ACCESS (Direct Access).
4 Use the number buttons to enter the
frequency of the radio station.
For example, to tune to 106.00 (FM), press 1, 0,
6, 0, 0.
If you make a mistake halfway through, press
D.ACCESS twice to cancel the frequency and
start over.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 49
Basic playback 05
50
En
Saving station presets
If you often listen to a particular radio station,
its convenient to have the receiver store the
frequency for easy recall whenever you want to
listen to that station. This saves the effort of
manually tuning in each time. This receiver can
memorize up to 63 stations, stored in seven
banks, or classes (A to G) of 9 stations each.
When saving an FM frequency, the MPX
setting (see page 49) is also stored.
1 Tune to a station you want to memorize.
See Listening to the radio on page 49 for more
on this.
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows PRESET MEMORY, then a
blinking memory class.
3 Press CLASS to select one of the seven
classes, then press PRESET / to select the
station preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons to select
a station preset.
4 Press ENTER.
After pressing ENTER, the preset class and
number stop blinking and the receiver stores
the station.
Naming station presets
For easier identification, you can name your
station presets.
1 Choose the station preset you want to
name.
See Listening to station presets below for how
to do this.
2 Press T.EDIT (TUNER EDIT).
The display shows PRESET NAME, then a
blinking cursor at the first character position.
3 Input the name you want.
Choose from the following characters for a
name up to eight characters long.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
0123456789
!#$%&()+,./:;<=>?@[ \ ]^_{|} [space]
Use / to select a character, / to set the
position, and ENTER to confirm your selection.
Tip
To erase a station name, simply repeat
steps 1 to 3 and input eight spaces instead
of a name.
Once you have named a station preset, you
can press DISP when listening to a station
to switch the display between name and
frequency.
Listening to station presets
You will need to have some presets stored to do
this. See Saving station presets above if you
havent done this already.
1 Press TUNER to select the tuner.
2 Press CLASS to select the class in which
the station is stored.
Press repeatedly to cycle through classes A to G.
3 Press PRESET / to select the station
preset you want.
You can also use the number buttons on the
remote control to recall the station preset.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 50
Basic playback 05
51
En
An introduction to RDS
Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by
most FM radio stations to provide listeners with
various kinds of informationthe name of the
station and the kind of show theyre
broadcasting, for example.
One feature of RDS is that you can search by
type of program. For example, you can search
for a station thats broadcasting a show with
the program type, JAZZ.
You can search the following program types:
1
Searching for RDS programs
One of the most useful features of RDS is the
ability to search for a particular kind of radio
program. You can search for any of the
program types listed above.
1 Press TUNER to select the FM band.
2
2 Press PTY SEARCH.
PTY SEARCH shows in the display.
3 Press PRESET / to select the program
type you want to hear.
4 Press ENTER to search for the program
type.
The system starts searching through all
frequency for a match. When it finds one, the
search stops and the station plays for five
seconds.
5 If you want to keep listening to the
station, press ENTER within the five seconds.
If you dont press ENTER, searching resumes.
If NO PTY is displayed it means the tuner
couldnt find that program type at the time of
the search.
3
Displaying RDS information
Use the DISP button to display the different
types of RDS information available.
4
Press DISP for RDS information.
Each press changes the display as follows:
Radio Text (RT) Messages sent by the
radio station. For example, a talk radio
station may provide a phone number as RT.
Program Service Name (PS) The name of
the radio station.
Program Type (PTY) This indicates the
kind of program currently being broadcast.
Current tuner frequency.
NEWS News
AFFAIRS Current Affairs
INFO General Information
SPORT Sport
EDUCATE Educational
DRAMA Radio plays, etc.
CULTURE National or
regional culture, theater,
etc.
SCIENCE Science and
technology
VARIED Usually talk-
based material, such as
quiz shows or interviews.
POP M Pop music
ROCK M Rock music
EASY M Easy listening
LIGHT M Light classical
music
CLASSICS Serious
classical music
OTHER M Music not
fitting above categories
WEATHER Weather
reports
FINANCE Stock market
reports, commerce,
trading, etc.
CHILDREN Programs for
children
SOCIAL Social affairs
RELIGION Programs
concerning religion
PHONE IN Public
expressing their views by
phone
TRAVEL Holiday-type
travel rather than traffic
announcements
LEISURE Leisure interests
and hobbies
JAZZ Jazz
COUNTRY Country music
NATION M Popular
music in a language other
than English
OLDIES Popular music
from the 50s and 60s
FOLK M Folk music
DOCUMENT Documentary
Note
1 In addition, there are two other program types, TEST and NONE. You cant search for these.
2 RDS is only possible in the FM band.
3 RDS searches all frequency. If the program type could not be found among all frequency, NO PTY is displayed.
4 If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
If you see NO RT DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station.
If you see NO PTY DATA in the PTY display, it means no PTY data can be received.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 51
Listening to your system 06
52
En
Chapter 6:
Listening to your system
Important
The listening modes and many features
described in this section may not be
available depending on the current source,
settings and status of the receiver.
Auto playback
There are many ways to listen back to sources
using this receiver, but for the simplest, most
direct listening option is the Auto Surround
feature. The receiver automatically detects what
kind of source youre playing and selects
multichannel or stereo playback as necessary.
1
While listening to a source, press
, then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT)
2
for
auto playback of a source.
AUTO SURROUND shows briefly in the display
before showing the decoding or playback
format. Check the digital format indicators in
the front panel display to see how the source is
being processed.
When listening to the FM radio, the Neural
THX feature is selected automatically (see
Using Neural THX on page 49 for more on
this).
In the Auto level control (ALC) mode, this
receiver equalizes playback sound levels.
Tip
When an ALC is selected, the effect level
can be adjusted using the EFFECT
parameter in Setting the Audio options on
page 63.
Listening in surround sound
Using this receiver, you can listen to any
source in surround sound. However, the
options available will depend on your speaker
setup and the type of source youre listening to.
If you connected surround back speakers, see
also Using surround back channel processing
on page 55.
Standard surround sound
The following modes provide basic surround
sound for stereo and multichannel sources.
3
While listening to a source, press
, then press STANDARD
(STANDARD SURROUND).
If necessary, press repeatedly to select a
listening mode.
If the source is Dolby Digital, DTS, or Dolby
Surround encoded, the proper decoding
format will automatically be selected and
shows in the display.
4

Note
1 Stereo surround (matrix) formats are decoded accordingly using Neo:6 CINEMA or 2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE (see
Listening in surround sound above for more on these decoding formats).
The Auto Surround feature is canceled if you connect headphones.
2 For more options using this button, see Using Stream Direct on page 55.
RECEIVER
3 In modes that give 6.1 channel sound, the same signal is heard from both surround back speakers.
4 If surround back channel processing (page 55) is switched OFF, or the surround back speakers are set to NO (this
happens automatically if the Surround back speaker setting on page 93 is set to anything but Normal), 2 Pro Logic
IIx becomes 2 Pro Logic II (5.1 channel sound).
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 52
Listening to your system 06
53
En
With two channel sources, you can select from:
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE Up to 7.1 channel
sound, especially suited to movie sources
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC Up to 7.1 channel
sound, especially suited to music sources
1
2 Pro Logic IIx GAME Up to 7.1 channel
sound, especially suited to video games
2 PRO LOGIC 4.1 channel surround
sound (sound from the surround speakers
is mono)
Neo:6 CINEMA 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to movie sources
Neo:6 MUSIC 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources
2
Neural THX Up to 7.1 channel sound,
especially suited to music sources
3
With multichannel sources, if you have
connected surround back speaker(s) and have
selected SBch ON, you can select (according to
format):
2 Pro Logic IIx MOVIE See above (only
available when youre using two surround
back speakers)
2 Pro Logic IIx MUSIC See above
Dolby Digital EX Creates surround back
channel sound for 5.1 channel sources and
provides pure decoding for 6.1 channel
sources (like Dolby Digital Surround EX)
DTS-ES Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
playback with DTS-ES encoded sources
DTS Neo:6 Allows you to hear 6.1 channel
playback with DTS encoded sources
Using the Advanced surround effects
The Advanced surround effects can be used for
a variety of additional surround sound effects.
Most Advanced Surround modes are designed
to be used with film soundtracks, but some
modes are also suited for music sources. Try
different settings with various soundtracks to
see which you like.
Press , then press ADV SURR
(ADVANCED SURROUND) repeatedly to
select a listening mode.
4
ACTION Designed for action movies with
dynamic soundtracks
DRAMA Designed for movies with lots of
dialog
SCI-FI Designed for science fiction with
lots of special effects
MONO FILM Creates surround sound
from mono soundtracks
ENT.SHOW Suitable for musical sources
EXPANDED Creates an extra wide stereo
field
5
TV SURROUND Provides surround
sound for both mono and stereo TV
sources
ADVANCED GAME Suitable for video
games
SPORTS Suitable for sports programs
CLASSICAL Gives a large concert hall-
type sound
ROCK/POP Creates a live concert sound
for rock and/or pop music
Note
1 When listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music mode, there are three further parameters you can
adjust: C.WIDTH, DIMENSION and PANORAMA. See Setting the Audio options on page 63 to adjust them.
2 When listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 Cinema or Neo:6 Music mode, you can also adjust the center image
effect (see Setting the Audio options on page 63).
3 Neural THX can be selected for 2-channel signals for which the input signal is PCM (48 kHz or less), Dolby Digital,
DTS or analog 2-channel sources.
4 Depending on the source and the sound mode you have selected, you may not get sound from the surround back
speakers in your setup. For more on this, refer to Using surround back channel processing on page 55.
If you press ADV SURR when the headphones are connected, the PHONES SURROUND mode will automatically
be selected.
5 Use with Dolby Pro Logic for a stereo surround effect (stereo field is wider than Standard modes with Dolby Digital
sources).
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 53
Listening to your system 06
54
En
UNPLUGGED Suitable for acoustic
music sources
EXT.STEREO Gives multichannel sound to
a stereo source, using all of your speakers
PHONES SURR When listening through
headphones, you can still get the effect of
overall surround.
Tip
When an Advanced Surround listening
mode is selected, the effect level can be
adjusted using the EFFECT parameter in
Setting the Audio options on page 63.
Listening in stereo
When you select STEREO, you will hear the
source through just the front left and right
speakers (and possibly your subwoofer
depending on your speaker settings). Dolby
Digital, DTS and WMA9 Pro multichannel
sources are downmixed to stereo.
While listening to a source, press
, then press STEREO for stereo
playback.
Press repeatedly to switch between:
STEREO The audio is heard with your
surround settings and you can still use the
Midnight, Loudness, and Tone functions.
F.S.SURR FOCUS See Using Front Stage
Surround Advance below for more on this.
F.S.SURR WIDE See Using Front Stage
Surround Advance below for more on this.
Using Front Stage Surround
Advance
The Front Stage Surround Advance function
allows you to create natural surround sound
effects using just the front speakers and the
subwoofer.
While listening to a source, press
, then press STEREO to select Front
Stage Surround Advance modes.
STEREO See Listening in stereo above for
more on this.
F.S.SURR FOCUS Use to provide a rich
surround sound effect directed to the
center of where the front left and right
speakers sound projection area converges.
F.S.SURR WIDE Use to provide a
surround sound effect to a wider area than
FOCUS mode.
1
RECEIVER
Note
1 When using F.S.SURR WIDE, a better effect can be obtained if the Full Auto MCACC procedure under Advanced
MCACC is performed. For more on this, refer to Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37.
RECEIVER
FOCUS position
(Recommended)
WIDE position
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
Front left
speaker
Front right
speaker
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 54
Listening to your system 06
55
En
Using Stream Direct
Use the Stream Direct modes when you want
to hear the truest possible reproduction of a
source. All unnecessary signal processing is
bypassed, and youre left with the pure analog
or digital sound source.
While listening to a source, press
, then press AUTO/ALC/DIRECT
(AUTO SURR/ALC/STREAM DIRECT) to select
the mode you want.
Check the digital format indicators in the front
panel display to see how the source is being
processed.
AUTO SURROUND See Auto playback on
page 52.
ALC Listening in Auto level control mode
(page 52).
DIRECT Sources are heard according to
the settings made in the Surround Setup
(speaker setting, channel level, speaker
distance, acoustic calibration EQ, and X-
curve), as well as with dual mono, the input
attenuator, and any sound delay settings.
You will hear sources according to the
number of channels in the signal.
PURE DIRECT Analog sources are heard
without any digital processing. No sound is
output from the Speaker B in this mode.
Using surround back channel
processing
Default setting: SBch ON
You can have the receiver automatically use 6.1
or 7.1 decoding for 6.1 encoded sources (for
example, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES), or you
can choose to always use 6.1 or 7.1 decoding
(for example, with 5.1 encoded material). With
5.1 encoded sources, a surround back channel
will be generated, but the material may sound
better in the 5.1 format for which it was
originally encoded (in which case, you can
simply switch surround back channel
processing off).
With a 7.1-channel surround system, audio
signals that have undergone matrix
decoding processing through surround
back channel processing to which the Up
Mix function is added are output from the
surround back speakers.
Press , then press SBch
repeatedly to cycle the surround back
channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as
follows:
SBch ON Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component
from the surround component is turned on.
SBch AUTO Matrix decoding processing
for generating the surround back
component from the surround component
is switched automatically. Matrix decoding
processing is only performed when
surround back channel signals are
detected in the input signals.
SBch OFF Matrix decoding processing for
generating the surround back component
from the surround component is turned off.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 55
Listening to your system 06
56
En
Using the Virtual Surround Back
mode
Default setting: OFF
When youre not using surround back
speakers, selecting this mode allows you to
hear a virtual surround back channel through
your surround speakers. You can choose to
listen to sources with no surround back
channel information, or if the material sounds
better in the format (for example, 5.1) for which
it was originally encoded, you can have the
receiver only apply this effect to 6.1 encoded
sources like Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES.
1
Press SBch repeatedly to cycle the virtual
surround back channel options.
Each press cycles through the options as
follows:
VirtualSB ON Virtual Surround Back is
always used (for example, on 5.1 encoded
material)
VirtualSB AUTO Virtual Surround Back
is automatically applied to 6.1 encoded
sources (for example, Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES)
VirtualSB OFF Virtual Surround Back
mode is switched off
Setting the Up Mix function
In a 7.1-channel surround system with
surround speakers placed directly at the sides
of the listening position, the surround sound of
5.1-channel sources is heard from the side. The
Up Mix function mixes the sound of the
surround speakers with the surround back
speakers so that the surround sound is heard
from diagonally to the rear as it should be.
2
Using the Up Mix function is effective when
the speakers in the 7.1-channel surround
system are set up as recommended in the
example on page 17.
Depending on the positions of the speakers
and the sound source, in some cases it
may not be possible to achieve good
results. In this case, set the setting to OFF.
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
2 While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press C STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET < NO >.
Use TUNE +/ (or / on the remote control)
to select UP MIX <ON >, and then use
PRESET +/ (or / on the remote control) to
select ON or OFF.
3 Press ENTER to confirm.
When set to ON, the UP MIX indicator on
the front panel lights.
Note
1 You cant use the Virtual Surround Back mode when the headphones are connected to this receiver or when any of
the stereo, Front Stage Surround Advance or Stream Direct mode is selected.
You can only use the Virtual Surround Back mode if the surround speakers are on and the SB setting is set to NO
or if Front Bi-Amp, Speaker B or ZONE 2 is selected at Surr Back System.
The Virtual Surround Back mode cannot be applied to sources that do not have surround channel information.
2 Set to ON regardless of this setting when playing DTS-HD signals.
May automatically be set to OFF even when set to ON, depending on the input signal and listening mode.
?
C SW
FL FR
SL SR
SBL SBR SBL SBR
C SW
FL FR
SL SR
Up Mix OFF Up Mix ON
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 56
Listening to your system 06
57
En
Selecting MCACC presets
Default setting: MEMORY 1
If you have calibrated your system for different
listening positions
1
, you can switch between
settings to suit the kind of source youre
listening to and where youre sitting (for
example, watching movies from a sofa, or
playing a video game close to the TV).
While listening to a source, press
, then press MCACC.
Press repeatedly to select one of the six
MCACC presets
2
. See Data Management on
page 90 to check and manage your current
settings.
Choosing the input signal
On this receiver, it is possible to switch the
input signals for the different inputs as
described below.
3
Press , then press SIGNAL SEL
to select the input signal corresponding to
the source component.
Each press cycles through the options as
follows:
AUTO The receiver selects the first
available signal in the following order:
HDMI; DIGITAL; ANALOG.
ANALOG Selects an analog signal.
DIGITAL Selects an optical or coaxial
digital signal.
HDMI Selects an HDMI signal.
4
PCM For PCM input signals.
5
The
receiver selects the first available signal in
the following order: HDMI; DIGITAL.
When set to DIGITAL or AUTO, the indicators
light according to the signal being decoded, as
follows:
2 DIGITAL lights with Dolby Digital
decoding.
2 DIGITAL PLUS lights with Dolby Digital
Plus decoding.
2 TrueHD lights with Dolby TrueHD
decoding.
DTS lights with DTS decoding.
DTS HD lights with DTS-HD decoding.
MSTR lights with DTS-HD Master Audio
decoding.
96/24 lights with DTS 96/24 decoding.
Note
1 Different presets might also have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how
youre using your system. These presets can be set in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37 or Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 77, either of which you should have already completed.
2 These settings have no effect when headphones are connected.
You can also press / to select the MCACC preset.
3 This receiver can only play back Dolby Digital, PCM (32 kHz to 192 kHz), DTS (including DTS 96/24) and WMA9 Pro
digital signal formats. The compatible signals via the HDMI terminals are: Dolby Digital, DTS, WMA9 Pro, PCM (32
kHz to 192 kHz), Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-EXPRESS, DTS-HD Master Audio, SACD and DVD Audio
(including 192 kHz). With other digital signal formats, set to ANALOG (the MULTI CH IN and TUNER).
You may get digital noise when a LD or CD player compatible with DTS is playing an analog signal. To prevent noise,
make the proper digital connections (page 29) and set the signal input to DIGITAL.
Some DVD players dont output DTS signals. For more details, refer to the instruction manual supplied with your
DVD player.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
4 When the HDMI option in Setting the Audio options on page 63 is set to THROUGH, the sound will be heard through
your TV, not from this receiver.
5 This is useful if you find there is a slight delay before AUTO recognizes the PCM signal on a CD, for instance.
When PCM is selected, noise may be output during playback of non-PCM sources. Please select another input
signal if this is a problem.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 57
Listening to your system 06
58
En
WMA9 Pro lights to indicate that a WMA9
Pro signal is being decoded.
HDMI is not assigned by default. To select
an HDMI signal, conduct the input setup
procedure (see The Input Setup menu on
page 39).
Better sound using Phase
Control
This receivers Phase Control feature uses
phase correction measures to make sure your
sound source arrives at the listening position
in phase, preventing unwanted distortion and/
or coloring of the sound.
Phase Control technology provides coherent
sound reproduction through the use of phase
matching
1
for an optimal sound image. The
default setting is on and we recommend
leaving Phase Control switched on for all
sound sources.
Press , then press PHASE CTRL
(PHASE CONTROL) to switch on phase
correction.
The PHASE CONTROL indicator on the front
panel lights.
Note
1 Phase matching is a very important factor in achieving proper sound reproduction. If two waveforms are in phase,
they crest and trough together, resulting in increased amplitude, clarity and presence of the sound signal. If a crest
of a wave meets a trough, then the sound will be out of phase and an unreliable sound image will be produced.
The PHASE CONTROL feature is available even when the headphones are plugged in.
If your subwoofer has a phase control switch, set it to the plus (+) sign (or 0). However, the effect you can actually
feel when PHASE CONTROL is set to ON on this receiver depends on the type of your subwoofer. Set your subwoofer
to maximize the effect. It is also recommended you try changing the orientation or the place of your subwoofer.
Set the built-in lowpass filter switch of your subwoofer to off. If this cannot be done on your subwoofer, set the cutoff
frequency to a higher value.
If the speaker distance is not properly set, you may not have a maximized PHASE CONTROL effect.
The PHASE CONTROL mode cannot be set to ON in the following cases:
When the PURE DIRECT mode is switched on.
When the MULTI CH IN input is selected.
When the HDMI audio output parameter is set to THROUGH in Setting the Audio options on page 63.
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 58
KURO LINK 07
59
En
Chapter 7
KURO LINK
Synchronized operation with a KURO LINK-
compatible Pioneer flat screen TV or Blu-ray
disc player or with a component of another
make that supports the KURO LINK function is
possible when the component is connected to
the receiver using an HDMI cable.
For details about concrete operations, settings,
etc., refer to also the operating instructions for
each component.
You cannot use this function with
components that do not support KURO
LINK.
We do not guarantee this receiver will work
with Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible
components or components of other makes
that support the KURO LINK function. We
do not guarantee that all synchronized
operations will work with components of
other makes that support the KURO LINK
function.
Use a High Speed HDMI cable when you
want to use the KURO LINK function. The
KURO LINK function may not work
properly if a different type of HDMI cable is
used.
Making the KURO LINK
connections
You can use synchronized operation for a
connected flat screen TV and up to four (VSX-
1019AH model)/three (VSX-919AH model) other
components.
Be sure to connect the flat screen TVs audio
cable to the audio input of this unit.
For details, see Connecting your TV and
playback components on page 23.
Important
When connecting this system or changing
connections, be sure to switch the power
off and disconnect the power cord from the
wall socket.
After completing all connections, connect
the power cords to the wall socket.
After this receiver is connected to an AC
outlet, a 2 second to 10 second HDMI
initialization process begins. You cannot
carry out any operations during
initialization. The HDMI indicator on the
display unit blinks during initialization, and
you can turn this receiver on once it has
stopped blinking.
To get the most out of this function, we
recommend that you connect your HDMI
component not to a flat screen TV but
rather directly to the HDMI terminal on this
receiver.
While the receiver is equipped with four
(VSX-1019AH model)/three (VSX-919AH
model) HDMI inputs, the KURO LINK
function can only be used with up to three
DVD or Blu-ray disc players or up to three
DVD or Blu-ray disc recorders.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 59
KURO LINK 07
60
En
Cautions on the KURO LINK function
Connect the TV directly to this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
Only connect components (Blu-ray disc
player, etc.) you intend to use as a source
to the HDMI input of this receiver.
Interrupting a direct connection with other
amps or an AV converter (such as an HDMI
switch) can cause operational errors.
When KURO LINK is set to ON, HDMI
Input is automatically set to OFF.
If a listening mode other than AUTO
SURROUND, ALC, DIRECT, PURE DIRECT
or STEREO is selected while the PQLS
effect is enabled, the PQLS effect is
disabled.
When this receiver is connected by HDMI
cable to a Pioneer player that is compatible
with the PQLS function via HDMI
connection and a CD is played or HDMI
reauthentication is performed (the HDMI
indicator blinks), the PQLS effect is
enabled and the listening mode is set to
AUTO SURROUND if a listening mode
other than AUTO SURROUND, ALC,
DIRECT, PURE DIRECT or STEREO is
selected.
When the receivers KURO LINK is turned
ON, even if the receivers power is in the
standby mode, it is possible to output the
audio and video signals from a player via
HDMI to the TV without producing sound
from the receiver, but only when a KURO
LINK-compatible component (Blu-ray disc
player, etc.) and compatible TV are
connected. In this case, the receivers
power turns on and the power and HDMI
indicators light.
About connections with a product of
a different brand that supports the
KURO LINK function
The synchronized operations below can be
used when the receivers KURO LINK function
is connected to a TV of a brand other than
Pioneer that supports the KURO LINK
function. (Depending on the TV, however,
some of the KURO LINK functions may not
work.)
You can set whether to output the sound
over the speakers connected to the
receiver or over the TVs speakers using the
TVs menu screen.
You can adjust the receivers volume or
mute the sound using the TVs remote
control.
When the TVs power is set to standby, the
receivers power is also set to standby.
(Only when the input for a component
connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching
the TV)
The sound of TV programs or an external
input connected to the TV can also be
output from the speakers connected to the
receiver. (This requires connection of an
optical digital cable, etc., in addition to the
HDMI cable.)
The synchronized operations below can be
used when the receivers KURO LINK function
is connected to a player or recorder of a brand
other than Pioneer that supports the KURO
LINK function.
When playback starts on the player or
recorder, the receivers input switches to
the HDMI input to which that component is
connected.
See the Pioneer website for the latest
information on the models of non-Pioneer
brands and products that support the KURO
LINK function.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 60
KURO LINK 07
61
En
KURO LINK Setup
You must adjust the settings of this receiver as
well as KURO LINK-compatible connected
components in order to make use of the KURO
LINK function. For more information see the
operating instructions for each component.
1 Press , then press Home Menu.
2 Select System Setup, then press ENTER.
3 Select Other Setup, then press ENTER.
4 Select the KURO LINK setting you want.
Choose whether to set this units KURO LINK
function ON or OFF. You will need to set it to
ON to use the KURO LINK function.
When using a component that does not
support the KURO LINK function, set this to
OFF.
ON Enables the KURO LINK function.
When this units power is turned off and
you have a supported source begin
playback while using the KURO LINK
function, the audio and video output from
the HDMI connection are output from the
flat screen TV.
OFF The KURO LINK is disabled.
Synchronized operations cannot be used.
When this units power is turned off, audio
and video of sources connected via HDMI
are not output.
5 Select the Display Power Off setting
you want.
If the TVs power is turned off while using the
KURO LINK function, the receivers power is
also turned off (all power off function). This
function can be disabled.
YES The all power off function is enabled.
The receivers power turns off together with
the TVs power.
This function only works when the input for
a component connected to the receiver by
HDMI connection is selected or when
watching the TV.
NO The all power off function is disabled.
The receivers power is not affected when
the TVs power is turned off.
6 When youre finished, press HOME MENU.
You will finish to HOME MENU.
Setting the PQLS function
PQLS (Precision Quartz Lock System) is a
digital audio signal transfer control technology
using the KURO LINK function. It offers higher-
quality audio playback by controlling audio
signals from the receiver to a PQLS compatible
player, etc. This enables removing jitter that
has a negative effect on the quality of the
sound and is generated upon transmission.
This function is activated when KURO LINK is
set to ON.
1 Press , then press PQLS to
select PQLS setting.
The setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
PQLS AUTO PQLS is enabled. A
precision quartz controller in this receiver
eliminates distortion caused by timing
errors (jitter), giving you the best possible
digital-to-analog conversion from audio CD
sources when you use the HDMI interface.
This is valid as an HDMI function for PQLS-
compatible players.
PQLS OFF PQLS is disabled.
RECEIVER
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
4d1.KURO LINK Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
KURO LINK : ON
Display Power Off : YES
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 61
KURO LINK 07
62
En
Before using synchronization
Once you have finished all connections and
settings, you must:
1 Put all components into standby mode.
2 Turn the power on for all components,
with the power for the flat screen TV being
turned on last.
3 Choose the HDMI input to which the TV is
connected to this receiver, and see if video
output from connected components displays
properly on the screen or not.
4 Check whether the components
connected to all HDMI inputs are properly
displayed.
Synchronized amp mode
The synchronized amp mode can be set from
the KURO LINK-compatible TVs remote
control. See the explanation below for
operations in the synchronized amp mode.
These functions are set from the TVs menu
screen. For more information, refer to the
operating instructions of the KURO LINK-
compatible TV.
Synchronized amp mode operations
When using the synchronized amp mode, the
KURO LINK-compatible component
connected to the receiver operates in sync as
described below.
The receivers volume can be set and the
sound can be muted using the TVs remote
control.
When the TVs power is set to standby, the
receivers power is also set to standby.
(Only when the input for a component
connected to the receiver by HDMI
connection is selected or when watching
the TV)
The receivers input switches automatically
when the KURO LINK-compatible
component is played.
The receivers input switches automatically
when the TVs channel is switched.
The synchronized amp mode remains in
effect even if the receivers input is
switched to a component other than one
connected by HDMI.
The operations below can also be used on
Pioneer KURO LINK-compatible flat screen
TVs.
When the receivers volume is adjusted or
the sound is muted, the volume status is
displayed on the flat screen TVs screen.
When the OSD language is switched on
the flat screen TV, the receivers language
setting also switches accordingly.
Canceling synchronized amp mode
When the synchronized amp mode is
canceled, the receivers power turns off if
you were viewing an HDMI input or a TV
program on the TV.
When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled when
the receivers power is turned off. To turn
the synchronized amp mode back on,
select the synchronized amp mode using
the TVs remote control.
When in the synchronized amp mode, the
synchronized amp mode is canceled if an
operation that produces sound from the TV
is performed from the TVs menu screen,
etc.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 62
Using other functions 08
63
En
Chapter 8:
Using other functions
Setting the Audio options
There are a number of additional sound
settings you can make using the AUDIO
PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated,
are listed in bold.
Important
Note that if a setting doesnt appear in the
AUDIO PARAMETER menu, it is
unavailable due to the current source,
settings and status of the receiver.
1 Press , then press AUDIO
PARAMETER.
2 Use / to select the setting you want to
adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the
receiver, certain options may not be able to be
selected. Check the table below for notes on
this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for
each setting.
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the
menu.
RECEIVER
Setting What it does Option(s)
MCACC
(MCACC preset)
Selects your favorite MCACC preset memory when multiple preset
memories are saved. When a MCACC preset memory has been
renamed, the given name is displayed.
M1. MEMORY 1 to
M6. MEMORY 6
Default:
M1. MEMORY 1
EQ
(Acoustic
Calibration EQ)
Switches on/off the effects of EQ Pro. ON
OFF
a
S-WAVE
(Standing Wave)
Switches on/off the effects of Standing Wave Control. ON
OFF
DELAY
(Sound Delay)
Some monitors have a slight delay when showing video, so the
soundtrack will be slightly out of sync with the picture. By adding
a bit of delay, you can adjust the sound to match the presentation
of the video.
0.0 to 10.0 (frames)
1 second = 25
frames (PAL)
Default: 0.0
MIDNIGHT Allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low
volumes.
MIDNIGHT/
LOUDNESS OFF
MIDNIGHT ON
LOUDNESS Used to get good bass and treble from music sources at low
volumes.
LOUDNESS ON
TONE
b
(Tone Control)
Applies the treble and bass tone controls to a source, or bypasses
them completely.
BYPASS
ON
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 63
Using other functions 08
64
En
BASS
c
Adjusts the amount of bass. 6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
TREBLE
c
Adjusts the amount of treble. 6 to +6 (dB)
Default: 0 (dB)
S.RTRV
(Sound Retriever)
With the Sound Retriever function, DSP processing is used to
compensate for the loss of audio data upon compression,
improving the sounds sense of density and modulation.
OFF
d
ON
DNR
(Digital Noise
Reduction)
May improve the quality of sound in a noisy source (for example,
video tape with lots of background noise) when switched on.
OFF
ON
DIALOG E.
(Dialog
Enhancement)
Localizes dialog in the center channel to make it stand out from
other background sounds in a TV or movie soundtrack.
OFF
ON
DUAL
(Dual Mono)
Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital soundtracks
should be played. Dual mono is not widely used, but is sometimes
necessary when two languages need to be sent to separate
channels.
CH1 Channel 1 is
heard only
CH2 Channel 2 is
heard only
CH1 CH2 Both
channels heard from
front speakers
DRC
(Dynamic Range
Control)
Adjusts the level of dynamic range for movie soundtracks
optimized for Dolby Digital, DTS, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby
TrueHD, DTS-HD and DTS-HD Master Audio (you may need to use
this feature when listening to surround sound at low volumes).
AUTO
e
MAX
MID
OFF
LFE
(LFE Attenuate)
Some Dolby Digital and DTS audio sources include ultra-low bass
tones. Set the LFE attenuator as necessary to prevent the ultra-low
bass tones from distorting the sound from the speakers.
The LFE is not limited when set to 0 dB, which is the
recommended value. When set to 5 dB, 10 dB, 15 dB or 20
dB, the LFE is limited by the respective degree. When OFF is
selected, no sound is output from the LFE channel.
0dB/ 5dB/ 10dB/
15dB/ 20dB
OFF
SACD GAIN
f
Brings out detail in SACDs by maximizing the dynamic range
(during digital processing).
0dB
+6 dB
HDMI
g
(HDMI Audio)
Specifies the routing of the HDMI audio signal out of this receiver
(amp) or through to a TV or flat screen TV. When THROUGH is
selected, no sound is output from this receiver.
AMPLIFIER
THROUGH
A. DELAY
(Auto delay)
This feature automatically corrects the audio-to-video delay
between components connected with an HDMI cable. The audio
delay time is set depending on the operational status of the
display connected with an HDMI cable. The video delay time is
automatically adjusted according to the audio delay time.
h
OFF
ON
Setting What it does Option(s)
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 64
Using other functions 08
65
En
C. WIDTH
i
(Center Width)
(Applicable only
when using a center
speaker)
Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the
center channel between the front right and left speakers, making
it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
0 to 7
Default: 3
DIMENSION
i
Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to
back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more
forward (positive settings).
3 to +3
Default: 0
PANORAMA
i
Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers
for a wraparound effect.
OFF
ON
C. IMAGE
j
(Center Image)
(Applicable only
when using a center
speaker)
Adjusts the center image to create a wider stereo effect with
vocals. Adjust the effect from 0 (all center channel sent to front
right and left speakers) to 10 (center channel sent to the center
speaker only).
0 to 10
Defaults:
Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
EFFECT Sets the effect level for the currently selected Advanced Surround
or ALC mode (each mode can be set separately).
10 to 90
a.When EQ OFF is selected, the MCACC indicator does not light.
b.This setting is only displayed when the listening mode is Stereo, Auto surround (STEREO) or ALC (STEREO).
c.The adjustment can be made only when TONE is set to ON.
d.With the iPod/USB input function, by default S.RTRV is set to ON.
e.The initially set AUTO is only available for Dolby TrueHD signals. Select MAX or MID for signals other than Dolby
TrueHD.
f. You shouldnt have any problems using this with most SACD discs, but if the sound distorts, it is best to switch the
gain setting back to 0 dB.
g. HDMI Audio setting cannot be switched while performing synchronized amp mode operations.
The synchronized amp mode must be turned on in order to play the receivers HDMI audio and video input signals
from the TV with the receivers power in the standby mode. See Synchronized amp mode on page 62.
h.This feature is only available when the connected display supports the automatic audio/video synchronizing capability
(lipsync) for HDMI. If you find the automatically set delay time unsuitable, set A. DELAY to OFF and adjust the delay
time manually. For more details about the lipsync feature of your display, contact the manufacturer directly.
i. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Dolby Pro Logic IIx Music/Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode.
j. Only when listening to 2-channel sources in Neo:6 MUSIC/CINEMA mode.
Setting What it does Option(s)
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 65
Using other functions 08
66
En
Setting the Video options
There are a number of additional picture
settings you can make using the VIDEO
PARAMETER menu. The defaults, if not stated,
are listed in bold.
Important
Note that if an option cannot be selected
on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu, it is
unavailable due to the current source,
setting and status of the receiver.
These functions do not affect HDMI inputs.
1 Press , then press VIDEO
PARAMETER.
2 Use / to select the setting you want to
adjust.
Depending on the current status/mode of the
receiver, certain options may not be able to be
selected. Check the table below for notes on
this.
3 Use / to set it as necessary.
See the table below for the options available for
each setting.
1
4 Press RETURN to confirm and exit the
menu.
Note
1 All of the setting items can be set for each input function.
Setting items other than V. CONV can only be selected when V. CONV is set to ON.
RECEIVER
Setting What it does Option(s)
V. CONV
a
(Digital Video Conversion)
Converts video signals for output from the MONITOR OUT jacks
(including HDMI OUT connector) for all video types (see page 22).
ON
OFF
RES
b
(Resolution)
*VSX-1019AH model only
Specifies the output resolution of the video signal (when analog
video input signals are output at the HDMI OUT connector, select
this according to the resolution of your monitor and the images
you wish to watch).
AUTO
PURE
480p/576p
720p
1080i
1080p
ASP
c
(Aspect)
*VSX-1019AH model only
Specifies the aspect ratio when analog video input signals are
output at the HDMI output. Make your desired settings while
checking each setting on your display (if the image doesnt match
your monitor type, cropping or black bands appear).
THROUGH
NORMAL
IP CONV
d,e,f
(I/P Converter)
*VSX-919AH model only
480i/576i analog video signals are converted to progressive
signals for output.
When set to AUTO, the signals are output with the optimum
setting for the connected display by HDMI.
When set to ON, the signals are up-converted to 480p/576p for
output.
When set to OFF, the signals are not converted for output.
AUTO
ON
OFF
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 66
Using other functions 08
67
En
PCINEMA
d,f,g
(PureCinema)
This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video
output is set to progressive. Usually set to AUTO; but try
switching to OFF if the picture appears unnatural.
Additionally, certain PAL movie video (576i, 25 frames/second
STB video output or DVD disc playback, etc.) that contain film
progressive material cannot be recognized as such by this
receiver. In such instances, if you choose PAL, PureCinema mode
is activated.
AUTO
PAL
OFF
P.MOTION
d,f
(Progressive Motion)
Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is
set to progressive.
4 to +4
Default: 0
YNR
d
Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y
(brightness) component.
0 to +8
Default: 0
DETAIL
d
Adjusts how sharp edges appear. 4 to +4
Default: 0
SHARP
d,h
(Sharpness)
Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements
in the picture.
4 to +4
Default: 0
BRIGHT
d
(Brightness)
Adjusts the overall brightness. 6 to +6
Default: 0
CONTRAST
d
Adjusts the contrast between light and dark. 6 to +6
Default: 0
HUE
d,i
Adjusts the red/green balance. 6 to +6
Default: 0
CHROMA
d
(Chroma Level)
Adjusts saturation from dull to bright. 6 to +6
Default: 0
a.This setting is not displayed when the function is set to iPod/USB and a JPEG file on the USB device is being displayed
in the full screen mode or when the iPod is being operated from the iPod itself.
b. When set to a resolution with which the TV (monitor) is not compatible, no picture is output. Also, in some cases
no picture will be output due to copyright protection signals. In this case, change the setting.
When AUTO is selected, the resolution is selected automatically according to the capacity of the TV (monitor)
connected by HDMI. When PURE is selected, the signals are output with the same resolution as when input (At this
time, video signals are only output from the same type of terminals to which they were input).
When a display is connected by HDMI, if this is set to something other than PURE and 480i/576i analog signals are
input, 480p/576p signals are output from the component output terminals.
c. If the image doesnt match your monitor type, adjust the aspect ratio on the source component or on the monitor.
NORMAL setting is only displayed when 480i/p or 576i/p video signals are being input.
d.This setting is only displayed when 480i or 576i video signals are being input.
e.If the picture does not display properly when AUTO or PAL is selected, select OFF.
f. This setting is only valid for component outputs.
g.If the picture does not display properly when PAL is selected, select AUTO or OFF.
h.This setting is not valid for HDMI output.
i. This setting is not displayed for component inputs.
Setting What it does Option(s)
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 67
Using other functions 08
68
En
Switching the speaker system
If you selected Speaker B in Surround back
speaker setting on page 93, three speaker
system settings are possible using SPEAKERS.
If you selected Normal, Front Bi-Amp or
ZONE 2, the button will simply switch your
main speaker system on or off. The options
below are for the Speaker B setting only.
1
Use SPEAKERS on the front panel to
select a speaker system setting.
As mentioned above, if you have selected
Normal, the button will simply switch your
main speaker system (A) on or off.
Press repeatedly to choose a speaker system
option:
SP>A Sound is output from speaker
system A.
SP>B Sound is output from the two
speakers connected to speaker system B.
Multichannel sources will not be heard.
SP>AB Sound is output from speaker
system A (up to 5 channels, depending on
the source), the two speakers in speaker
system B, and the subwoofer. The sound
from speaker system B will be the same as
the sound from speaker system A
(multichannel sources will be downmixed
to 2 channels).
SP> (off) No sound is output from the
speakers.
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls
The following steps use the front panel controls
to adjust the sub zone volume and select
sources. See MULTI-ZONE remote controls on
page 69.
1 Press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel.
Each press selects a MULTI-ZONE option:
ZONE 2 ON Switches the MULTI-ZONE
feature on
MULTI ZONE OFF Switches the MULTI-
ZONE feature off
The MULTI-ZONE indicator lights when the
MULTI-ZONE control has been switched ON.
2 Press MULTI-ZONE CONTROL on the
front panel.
When the receiver is on,
2
make sure that
any operations for the sub zone are done
while ZONE 2 shows in the display. If this is
not showing, the front panel controls affect
the main zone only.
3 Use the INPUT SELECTOR dial to select
the source for the sub zone.
For example, ZONE 2 CD-R sends the source
connected to the CD-R inputs to the sub room
(ZONE 2).
If you select TUNER, you can use the tuner
controls to select a preset station (see
Saving station presets on page 50 if youre
unsure how to do this).
3
VSX-919AH model only: iPod/USB function
cannot be selected for the MULTI-ZONE
feature.
Note
1 The subwoofer output depends on the settings you made in Manual speaker setup on page 93. However, if SP>B is
selected above, no sound is heard from the subwoofer (the LFE channel is not downmixed).
All speaker systems (except Speaker B connections) are switched off when headphones are connected.
2 If the receiver is in standby, the display is dimmed, and ZONE 2 DVD for example shows in the display.
3 The tuner cannot be tuned to more than one station at a time. Therefore, changing the station in one zone also
changes the station in the other zone. Please be careful not to change stations when recording a radio broadcast.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 68
Using other functions 08
69
En
4 Use the MASTER VOLUME dial to adjust
the volume for the sub zone.
This is only possible if you selected the
Variable volume control in ZONE Audio Setup
on page 98.
1
5 When youre finished, press MULTI-ZONE
CONTROL again to return to the main zone
controls.
You can also press MULTI-ZONE ON/OFF on
the front panel to switch off all output to the
sub zone.
2
MULTI-ZONE remote controls
Set the MULTI-ZONE operation switch to ZONE 2
to operate the corresponding zone.
The following table shows the possible MULTI-
ZONE remote controls:
Making an audio or a video
recording
You can make an audio or a video recording
from the built-in tuner, or from an audio or
video source connected to the receiver (such
as a CD player or TV).
3
Keep in mind you cant make a digital
recording from an analog source or vice-versa,
so make sure the components you are
recording to/from are hooked up in the same
way (see Connecting your equipment on
page 14 for more on connections).
Since the video converter is not available when
making recordings (from the video OUT jacks)
make sure to use the same type of video cable
for connecting your recorder as you used to
connect your video source (the one you want to
record) to this receiver. For example, you must
connect your recorder using Component video
if your source has also been connected using
Component video.
For more information about video connections,
see Connecting a HDD/DVD recorder, VCR and
other video sources on page 28.
1 Select the source you want to record.
Use the input function buttons (or INPUT
SELECT).
If necessary, press , then press
SIGNAL SEL to select the input signal
corresponding to the source component
(see Choosing the input signal on page 57
for more on this).
2 Prepare the source you want to record.
Tune to the radio station, load the CD, video,
DVD etc.
Note
1 The volume levels of the main and sub zone are independent.
2 You wont be able to switch the main zone off completely unless youve switched off the MULTI-ZONE control first.
If you dont plan to use the MULTI-ZONE feature for a while, turn off the power in both the sub and main rooms so
that this receiver is in standby.
Button What it does
C Switches on/off power in the sub
zone.
INPUT
SELECT
Use to select the input function in
the sub zone.
Input
function
buttons
Use to select the input function
directly (this may not work for some
functions) in the sub zone.
MASTER
VOLUME
+/
Use to set the listening volume in the
sub zone.
3 The receivers volume, Audio parameters (the tone controls, for example), and surround effects have no effect on
the recorded signal.
Some digital sources are copy-protected, and can only be recorded in analog.
Some video sources are copy-protected. These cannot be recorded.
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 69
Using other functions 08
70
En
3 Prepare the recorder.
Insert a blank tape, MD, video etc. into the
recording device and set the recording levels.
Refer to the instructions that came with the
recorder if you are unsure how to do this. Most
video recorders set the audio recording level
automaticallycheck the components
instruction manual if youre unsure.
4 Start recording, then start playback of the
source component.
Reducing the level of an analog
signal
The input attenuator lowers the input level of
an analog signal when its too strong. You can
use this if you find that the OVER indicator
lights often or you can hear distortion in the
sound.
1
Press , then press A.ATT to
switch the input attenuator on or off.
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer switches the receiver into
standby after a specified amount of time so you
can fall asleep without worrying about the
receiver being left on all night. Use the remote
control to set the sleep timer.
Press , then press SLEEP
repeatedly to set the sleep time.
You can check the remaining sleep time at
any time by pressing SLEEP once. Pressing
repeatedly will cycle through the sleep
options again.
2
Dimming the display
You can choose between four brightness levels
for the front panel display. Note that when
selecting sources, the display automatically
brightens for a few seconds.
Press , then press DIMMER
repeatedly to change the brightness of the
front panel display.
Checking your system settings
Use the status display screen to check your
current settings for features such as surround
back channel processing and your current
MCACC preset.
1 Press , then press STATUS to
check the system settings.
These appear on the front panel display.
3
The front panel display shows each of the
following settings for three seconds each:
2 When youre finished, press STATUS
again to switch off the display.
Note
1 The attenuator isnt available with digital sources, or when using the Stream Direct (ANALOG DIRECT) modes.
2 You can also switch off the sleep timer simply by switching off the receiver.
The sleep timer is valid for all zones. If any zone is on, the sleep timer continues functioning.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
30 min 60 min
90 min Off
3 If the Pure Direct mode is switched on, some settings above will show OFF, even though they are on.
Input function

Sampling Frequency

Surround Back channel Processing

MCACC preset

ZONE 2 input

KURO LINK
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 70
Using other functions 08
71
En
Resetting the system
Use this procedure to reset all the receivers
settings to the factory default. Use the front panel
controls to do this. Set MULTI-ZONE to OFF.
Disconnect the iPod and USB memory
device from the receiver beforehand.
1 Switch the receiver into standby.
2 While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press C STANDBY/ON.
The display shows RESET < NO >.
3 Select RESET using PRESET +/, then
press ENTER on the front panel.
The display shows RESET? OK.
4 Press ENTER to confirm.
OK appears in the display to indicate that the
receiver has been reset to the factory default
settings.
Note that all settings will be saved, even if
the receiver is unplugged.
Default system settings
Setting Default
Digital Video Conversion ON
SPEAKERS A
Surround Back System Normal
Speaker System Front SMALL
Center SMALL
Surr SMALL
SB SMALLx2
SW YES
Crossover 80 Hz
X-Curve OFF
DIMMER Medium bright
Inputs
See Input function default and possible settings on
page 40.
MULTI-ZONE
ZONE 2 Volume Level Variable
ZONE 2 Volume 60 dB
HDMI
HDMI Audio Amp
KURO LINK ON
DSP
Surround back channel
Processing
ON
Phase Control ON
Sound Retriever iPod/USB
function
ON
Other functions OFF
Sound Delay 0.0 frame
Dual Mono CH1
DRC AUTO
SACD Gain 0 dB
LFE Attenuate 0 dB
Auto delay OFF
UP Mix ON
Digital Safety OFF
Effect Level ExtendedStereo 90
Other modes 50
2 PL II Music
Options
Center Width 3
Dimension 0
Panorama OFF
Neo:6 Options Center Image Neo:6 MUSIC: 3
Neo:6 CINEMA: 10
All Inputs Listening Mode
(2 ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode
(x ch)
AUTO
SURROUND
Listening Mode
(HP)
STEREO
See also Setting the Audio options on page 63 for
other default DSP settings.
MCACC
MCACC Position Memory M1: MEMORY 1
Channel Level (M1 to M6) 0.0 dB
Speaker Distance (M1 to M6) 3.00 m
Standing Wave
(M1 to M6)
ATT of all
channels/filters
0.0 dB
SWch Wide
Trim
0.0 dB
EQ Data (M1 to
M6)
All channels/
bands
0.0 dB
EQ Wide Trim 0.0 dB
Setting Default
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 71
Controlling the rest of your system 09
72
En
Chapter 9:
Controlling the rest of your
system
Operating multiple receivers
The remote control included with this receiver
can be used to operate up to three other
receivers (of the same model as this receiver)
in addition to this receiver. The receiver to be
operated is switched by inputting the preset
code to set the remote control setting.
Set the remote modes on the receivers
before using this function (see Remote
Control Mode Setup on page 100).
1 Check the operation selector switch to
MAIN.
2 Press .
3 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then
release it after the LED flashes twice.
4 Use the number buttons to enter the 5-
digit preset code (see below).
Receiver 1: 6 1 9 3 5 (Default)
Receiver 2: 6 2 6 3 0
Receiver 3: 6 2 6 3 1
Receiver 4: 6 2 6 3 2
When the preset code is fully input, the LED
flashes once to indicate that the setting is
completed.
To operate another receiver, start over from
step 1 to input its preset code.
Setting the remote to control
other components
Most components can be assigned to one of
the input function buttons (such as DVD or
CD) using the components manufacturer
preset code stored in the remote.
However, there are cases where only certain
functions may be controllable after assigning
the proper preset code, or the codes for the
manufacturer in the remote control will not
work for the model that you are using.
Note
You can cancel or exit any of the steps by
pressing . To go back a step,
press RETURN.
After one minute of inactivity, the remote
automatically exits the operation.
Selecting preset codes directly
1 Press the input function button for the
component you want to control.
1
When assigning preset codes to TV CONTROL,
press TV CTRL here.
2 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then
release it after the LED flashes twice.
3 Use the number buttons to enter the 5-
digit preset code.
See Preset code list on page 115.
RECEIVER
Note
1 You cant assign , TUNER or iPod/USB.
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 72
Controlling the rest of your system 09
73
En
When the preset code is fully input, the LED
flashes once to indicate that the setting is
completed.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 for the other
components you want to control.
To try out the remote control, switch the
component on or off (into standby) by pressing
C SOURCE. If it doesnt seem to work, select
the next code from the list (if there is one).
Resetting the remote control
presets
This will erase all preset remote control preset
codes and programmed buttons.
1 Check the operation selector switch to
MAIN.
2 Press .
3 Press and hold REMOTE SETUP, then
release it after the LED flashes twice.
4 Use the number buttons to enter 9, 8, 1.
The LED flashes four times to indicate that the
resetting is completed.
Default preset codes
Controls the components
This remote control can control components
after entering the proper codes (see Setting the
remote to control other components on page 72
for more on this). Use the input function
buttons to select the component.
The TV CONTROL buttons on the remote
control are dedicated to control the TV
assigned to the TV CTRL button. If you have
two TVs, assign the main TV to the TV CTRL
button.
Input function
button
Preset code
DVD 3 1 5 7 1
BD 3 2 4 4 2
DVR 2 2 3 0 6
HDMI 3 2 4 4 2
TV 1 3 0 0 0
CD 7 0 4 6 8
CD-R 7 1 0 8 7
VIDEO 2 0 0 5 8
TV CTRL 1 3 0 0 0
6 1 9 3 5
RECEIVER
RECEIVER
DVD BD DVR HDMI
TV CD CD-R
TUNER INPUT SELECT
VIDEO
iPodUSB
INPUT
T.EDIT
GUIDE
TOPMENU
BAND
MUTE
RETURN
iPod CTRL
HOME
MENU
LIST TOOLS
PTY
SEARCH
AUDIO
PARAMETER
VOL
AUTO/ALC/
DIRECT
PHASE CTRL STATUS
REMOTE
SETUP
MAIN ZONE 2
HDD DVD
STANDARD STEREO
MENU
ADV SURR
CH
TV CONTROL
1 2 3
SLEEP MCACC SIGNAL SEL
4 5 6
DIMMER A.ATT SBch
7 8 9
CLASS
MASTER
VOLUME
CH LEVEL D.ACCESS
0
ENTER
RECEIVER SOURCE
ENTER
TV/DTV
AUDIO INFO
DISP
MPX PQLS
CH
RECEIVER
TUNE
PRESET PRESET
TUNE
VIDEO
PARAMETER
RECEIVER TV CTRL
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 73
Controlling the rest of your system 09
74
En
Button(s) TV TV (Monitor) BD/DVD HDD/DVR VCR SAT/CATV
C SOURCE POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
Number
buttons
numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics numerics
(dot) (dot) KURO LINK CLEAR + -
ENTER
(CLASS)
ENTER CH ENTER ENTER ENTER - ENTER
EXIT/INFO EXIT TOP MENU TOP MENU - LIST
TOOLS/
GUIDE/EPG
USER MENU TOOLS GUIDE - GUIDE
/// /// /// /// /// - ///
ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER ENTER - ENTER
HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU HOME MENU - HOME/
MENU
RETURN RETURN RETURN RETURN - RETURN
HDD (Red) Red Red - HDD - Red
DVD (Green) Green Green - DVD - Green
(Yellow)
Yellow Yellow - VCR - Yellow
(Blue) Blue Blue MENU MENU - Blue
> - - > > > >
H - AUTO SETUP H H H H
N - FREEZE N N N N
- -
> - - > > > >
m TV/DTV AV SELECTION m m - m
> - SCREEN SIZE > > - >
AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO AUDIO
DISP DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY - DISPLAY/
INFO
CH +/ CH+/- CH+/- - CH+/- CH+/- CH+/-
N + > - - - - - RECORD
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 74
Controlling the rest of your system 09
75
En
a. Controls for SACD.
b. Controls for MD.
Button(s) LD
CD/CD-R/
SACD
MD/DAT TAPE
C SOURCE POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
POWER ON/
OFF
Number
buttons
numerics numerics numerics -
(dot) +10 >10/CLEAR CLEAR
b
CLEAR
ENTER
(CLASS)
ENTER DISK/ENTER OPEN/CLOSE
b
ENTER
TOP MENU - - MS
-
LEGATO LINK
a
- MS
/// /// - - H/N//>
ENTER ENTER - - -
- SACD SETUP
a
- -
RETURN - - -
> > > > >
H H H H H
N N N N N

> > > > >
m m m m m
> > > > >
AUDIO AUDIO PURE AUDIO
a
- -
DISP DISPLAY/
INFO
TIME
a
- -
Button(s)
TV
(Projector)
C SOURCE POWER ON
1 MOVIE
2 STANDARD
3 DYNAMIC
4 USER1
5 USER2
6 USER3
7 COLOR+
8 SHARP+
9 GAMMA
0 COLOR-
(dot) SHARP-
ENTER (CLASS) COLOR TEMP
EXIT
INFO
/// ///
ENTER ENTER
TEST
HIDE
MENU
HDMI1
> HDMI2
> COMP.
m VIDEO
H S-VIDEO
N BRIGHT-
> BRIGHT+
AUDIO POWER OFF
DISP ASPECT
CH +/ CONTRAST+/-
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 75
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
76
En
Chapter 10:
The Advanced MCACC menu
Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu
The Advanced MCACC (Multi Channel
ACoustic Calibration) system was developed in
Pioneers laboratories with the aim of making it
possible for home users to perform
adjustments of the same level as in a studio
easily and with high precision. The acoustic
characteristics of the listening environment
are measured and the frequency response is
calibrated accordingly to allow high precision,
automatic analysis and optimal calibration of
the sound field to bring it closer to a studio
environment than ever before. Furthermore,
while it was previously difficult to eliminate
standing waves, this receiver is equipped with
a standing wave control function using a
unique process to perform acoustic analysis
and reduce their influence.
This section describes how to calibrate the
sound field automatically and fine-adjust the
sound field data manually.
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use C RECEIVER to switch on.
1
If headphones are connected to the
receiver, disconnect them.
2 Press on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
2
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the
HOME MENU.
3 Select Advanced MCACC from the
HOME MENU, then press ENTER.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
Full Auto MCACC See Automatically
setting up for surround sound (Auto
MCACC) on page 37 for a quick and
effective automatic surround setup.
Auto MCACC See Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 77 for a more detailed
MCACC setup.
Manual MCACC Fine-tunes your speaker
settings and customize the Acoustic
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup
on page 81).
Demo No settings are saved and no
errors occur. When the speakers are
connected to this receiver, the test tone is
output repeatedly. Press RETURN to
cancel the test tone.
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the HOME MENU.
2 You cant use the HOME MENU when the iPod/USB input function is selected. When you set ZONE 2 to ON (page 68),
you cant use the HOME MENU.
RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Dat a Check
3. Dat a Management
4. Syst em Set up
Exi t Ret ur n
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
a. Ful l Aut o MCACC
b. Aut o MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 76
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
77
En
Automatic MCACC (Expert)
If your setup requires more detailed settings
than those provided in Automatically setting up
for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37,
you can customize your setup options below.
You can calibrate your system differently for up
to six different MCACC presets
1
, which are
useful if you have different listening positions
depending on the type of source (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video
game close to the TV).
2
Important
Make sure the microphone/speakers are
not moved during the Auto MCACC Setup.
Using the Auto MCACC Setup will
overwrite any existing settings for the
MCACC preset you select.
3
The screen saver will automatically appear
after five minutes of inactivity.
CAUTION
The test tones used in the Auto MCACC
Setup are output at high volume.
THX

THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be


registered in some jurisdictions. All rights
reserved.
1 Select Auto MCACC from the Advanced
MCACC menu, then press ENTER.
If the Advanced MCACC screen is not
displayed, refer to Making receiver settings from
the Advanced MCACC menu on page 76.
2 Select the parameters you want to set.
Use / to select the item, then use / to
set.
Note
1 These are stored in memory and referred to as MEMORY1 to MEMORY6 until you rename them in Data Management
on page 90.
2 You may also want to have separate calibration settings for the same listening position, depending on how youre
using your system.
3 Except in cases where you are only adjusting one parameter (i.e. channel level) from the Auto MCACC menu (step 2).
a. Ful l Aut o MCACC
b. Aut o MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
ALL
1b.Auto MCACC
START
Exi t
A/V RECEIVER
Ret ur n
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker : NO
ALL
1b.Auto MCACC
START
Exi t
A/V RECEIVER
Ret ur n
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
THX Speaker : NO
ALL
SYMMETRY : M1.MEMORY 1
1b.Auto MCACC
ALL CH ADJ : M2.MEMORY 2
FRONT ALIGH : M3.MEMORY 3
START
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Speaker Setting
Channel Level
Speaker Distance
EQ Pro & S-Wave
THX Speaker : NO
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 77
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
78
En
Auto MCACC The default is ALL
(recommended), but you can limit the
system calibration to only one setting (to
save time) if you want.
1
The available
options are ALL, Keep SP System,
2

Speaker Setting, Channel Level,
Speaker Distance and EQ Pro & S-Wave.
EQ Type (only available when the Auto
MCACC Menu above is EQ Pro & S-Wave)
This determines how the frequency
balance is adjusted.
After a single calibration is performed, each of
the following three correction curves can be
stored separately in the MCACC memory.
SYMMETRY (default) implements symmetric
correction for each pair of left and right
speakers to flatten the frequency-amplitude
characteristics. ALL CH ADJ is a flat setting
where all the speakers are set individually so
no special weighting is given to any one
channel. FRONT ALIGN
3
sets all speakers in
accordance with the front speaker settings (no
equalization is applied to the front left and right
channels).
THX Speaker (only available when the
Auto MCACC Menu above is ALL or
Speaker Setting) Select YES if you are
using THX speakers (set all speakers to
SMALL), otherwise leave it set to NO.
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point (only available
when the Auto MCACC Menu above is EQ
Pro & S-Wave) In addition to
measurements at the listening position,
you can use two more reference points for
which test tones will be analyzed for
standing waves. This is useful if you want to
get a balanced flat calibration for several
seating positions in your listening area.
4

Place the microphone at the reference
point indicated on-screen and note the last
microphone placement will be at your main
listening position:
3 Connect the microphone to the MCACC
SETUP MIC jack on the front panel.
Push down on the PUSH OPEN tab to
access the MCACC SETUP MIC jack.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the
speakers and the microphone.
If you have a tripod, use it to place the
microphone so that its about ear level at your
normal listening position. Otherwise, place the
microphone at ear level using a table or a chair.
Note
1 The EQ Pro & S-Wave measurement is also taken when Keep SP System or EQ Pro & S-Wave is selected. See
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional on page 85 for more on this.
Either effect of Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional and Standing Wave can be switched on and off in the
respective MCACC preset. For details, see Setting the Audio options on page 63.
2 The Keep SP System option allows you to calibrate your system while leaving your current speaker setting (page 94)
unchanged.
3 If you selected ALL as your Auto MCACC menu, you can specify the MCACC preset where you want to save the ALL
CH ADJ and FRONT ALIGN settings.
4 Switch the Multi-Point setting NO if you only use one listening position.
1 2
3
2nd reference
point
3rd reference
point
Main listening
position
MASTER
VOLUME
MCACC
SETUP MIC
SPEAKERS
VIDEO L R AUDIO
CONTROL
MULTI-ZONE
ON /OFF
VIDEO INPUT
VIDEO INPUT
R L AUDIO VIDEO USB
MCACC
SETUP MIC
USB
iPod
iPhone
iPod
iPhone
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 78
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
79
En
4 When youre finished settings the
options, select START then press ENTER.
5 Follow the instructions on-screen.
Make sure the microphone is connected.
If youre using a subwoofer, it is
automatically detected every time you
switch on the system. Make sure it is on
and the volume is turned up.
See Problems when using the Auto MCACC
Setup on page 39 for notes regarding high
background noise levels and other possible
interference.
6 Wait for the Auto MCACC Setup to finish
outputting test tones.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs test tones to determine the
speakers present in your setup. Try to be as
quiet as possible while its doing this.
Do not adjust the volume during the test
tones. This may result in incorrect speaker
settings.
With error messages (such as Too much
ambient noise! or Check microphone)
select RETRY after checking for ambient
noise (see Problems when using the Auto
MCACC Setup on page 39) and verifying the
mic connection. If there doesnt seem to be
a problem, you can simply select GO NEXT
and continue.
7 If necessary, confirm the speaker
configuration in the GUI screen.
1
The configuration shown on-screen should
reflect the actual speakers you have.
If no operations are performed for 10 seconds
while the speaker configuration check screen
is being displayed, the Auto MCACC Setup will
resume automatically. In this case, you dont
need to select OK and press ENTER in step 8.
If you see an ERR message (or the speaker
configuration displayed isnt correct), there
may be a problem with the speaker
connection.
If selecting RETRY doesnt work, turn off
the power and check the speaker
connections. If there doesnt seem to be a
problem, you can simply use / to select
the speaker and / to change the
setting and continue.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, the
speakers wiring (+ and ) may be inverted.
Check the speaker connections.
2
If the connections were wrong, turn off the
power, disconnect the power cord, then
reconnect properly. After this, perform the
Full Auto MCACC procedure again.
Note
1 This screen is only shown if you selected ALL or Speaker Setting from the Auto MCACC menu.
2 If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when using speakers that affect the phase
(dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.), Reverse Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly
connected. If this happens, select GO NEXT and continue.
Now Anal yzi ng... 2/10
Envi ronment Check
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
Ambi ent Noi se : OK
Mi crophone :
Speaker YES/NO :
L : YES
R : YES
C : YES
1b.Auto MCACC
SR : YES
SBR : YES
SBL : YES
SL : YES
SW : YES
10
OK RETRY
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 79
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
80
En
8 Make sure OK is selected, then press
ENTER.
A progress report is displayed on-screen while
the receiver outputs more test tones to
determine the optimum receiver settings for
channel level, speaker distance, and Acoustic
Calibration EQ.
Again, try to be as quiet as possible while this
is happening. It may take 3 to 7 minutes.
If you selected a STAND.WAVE Multi-
Point setup (in step 2), you will be asked to
place the mic at the 2nd and 3rd reference
points before finally placing it at your main
listening position.
9 The Auto MCACC Setup procedure is
completed and the Advanced MCACC menu
reappears automatically.
The settings made in the Auto MCACC Setup
should give you excellent surround sound from
your system, but it is also possible to adjust
these settings manually using the Manual
MCACC setup menu (starting below) or
Manual SP Setup menu (starting on
page 93).
1
You can also choose to view the settings by
selecting individual parameters from the
MCACC Data Check screen:
Speaker Setting The size and number of
speakers youve connected (see page 94
for more on this)
Channel Level The overall balance of
your speaker system (see page 82 or 95 for
more on this)
Speaker Distance The distance of your
speakers from the listening position (see
page 82 or 96 for more on this)
2
Standing Wave Filter settings to control
lower boomy frequencies (see page 84 for
more on this)
Acoustic Cal EQ Adjustments to the
frequency balance of your speaker system
based on the acoustic characteristics of
your room (see page 84 for more on this)
Press RETURN after you have finished checking
each screen. When youre finished, select
RETURN to go back to the HOME MENU.
Be sure to disconnect the microphone from
this receiver upon completion of the Auto
MCACC Setup.
Note
1 Depending on the characteristics of your room, sometimes identical speakers with cone sizes of around 12 cm will
end up with different size settings. You can correct the setting manually using the Manual speaker setup on page 93.
The subwoofer distance setting may be farther than the actual distance from the listening position. This setting
should be accurate (taking delay and room characteristics into account) and generally does not need to be changed.
If Auto MCACC Setup measurement results are incorrect due to the interaction of the speakers and viewing
environment, we recommend adjusting the settings manually.
Now Anal yzi ng...
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
Subwoofer Check :
Now Anal yzi ng... 5/10
Surround Anal ysi s
1b.Auto MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
Speaker System : OK
Channel Level :
Speaker Di stance :
Standi ng Wave :
Reverb :
Aco Cal EQ Pro :
2 Since the distance measurements have been set according to the sound characteristics of your speakers, there are
cases where (for optimal surround sound) the actual distance may differ from the speaker distance setting.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 80
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
81
En
Manual MCACC setup
You can use the settings in the Manual
MCACC setup menu to make detailed
adjustments when youre more familiar with
the system. Before making these settings, you
should have already completed Automatically
setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37.
You only need to make these settings once
(unless you change the placement of your
current speaker system or add new speakers).
CAUTION
The test tones used in the Manual MCACC
setup are output at high volume.
Important
You will need to first specify the MCACC
preset you want to adjust by pressing
MCACC before pressing HOME MENU
(step 2 in Making receiver settings from the
Advanced MCACC menu on page 76).
For some of the settings below, youll have
to connect the setup microphone to the
front panel and place it about ear level at
your normal listening position. Press
HOME MENU to display the HOME MENU
before you connect the microphone to this
receiver. If the microphone is connected
while the HOME MENU is not being
displayed, the display will change to the
Full Auto MCACC under Advanced
MCACC.
See Problems when using the Auto MCACC
Setup on page 39 for notes regarding high
background noise levels and other possible
interference.
If youre using a subwoofer, switch it on
and turn up the volume to the middle
position.
1 Select Manual MCACC from the
Advanced MCACC menu.
See Making receiver settings from the Advanced
MCACC menu on page 76 if youre not already
at this screen.
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If youre doing this for the first time, you might
want to make these settings in order.
Fine Channel Level Make fine
adjustments to the overall balance of your
speaker system (see Fine Channel Level on
page 82).
Fine SP Distance Make precise delay
settings for your speaker system (see Fine
Speaker Distance on page 82).
Standing Wave Control overly resonant
low frequencies in your listening room (see
Standing Wave on page 84).
The last two settings are specifically for
customizing the parameters explained in
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust on page 84:
EQ Adjust Manually adjust the frequency
balance of your speaker system while
listening to test tones (see Acoustic
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 84).
EQ Professional Calibrate your system
based on the direct sound coming from the
speakers and make detailed settings
according to your rooms reverb
characteristics (see Acoustic Calibration
EQ Professional on page 85).
a. Ful l Aut o MCACC
b. Aut o MCACC
c. Manual MCACC
d. Demo
1.Advanced MCACC
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
1. Fi ne Channel Level
2. Fi ne SP Di stance
3. Standi ng Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Pr of essi onal
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 81
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
82
En
Fine Channel Level
Default setting: 0.0dB (all channels)
You can achieve better surround sound by
properly adjusting the overall balance of your
speaker system. You can adjust the Channel
Level of each speaker in 0.5 dB increments. The
following setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using
the Manual speaker setup on page 93.
1 Select Fine Channel Level from the
Manual MCACC setup menu.
The volume increases to the 0.0 dB reference
level.
2 Adjust the level of the left channel.
This will be the reference speaker level, so you
may want to keep the level around 0.0dB so
that youll have plenty of room to adjust the
other speaker levels.
After pressing ENTER, test tones will be
output.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the
levels (+/10.0 dB) as necessary.
Use / to adjust the volume of the speaker
you selected to match the reference speaker.
When it sounds like both tones are the same
volume, press to confirm and continue to
the next channel.
For comparison purposes, the reference
speaker will change depending on which
speaker you select.
If you want to go back and adjust a
channel, simply use / to select it.
4 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
Fine Speaker Distance
Default setting: 3.00m (all speakers)
For proper sound depth and separation with
your system, it is necessary to add a slight bit
of delay to some speakers so that all sounds
will arrive at the listening position at the same
time. You can adjust the distance of each
speaker in 1 cm increments. The following
setting can help you make detailed
adjustments that you may not achieve using
the Manual speaker setup on page 93.
1. Fi ne Channel Level
2. Fi ne SP Di stance
3. Standi ng Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Pr of essi onal
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
CAUTION
Loud t est t ones wi l l be out put .
Pl ease wai t ...**
1c1.Fine Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Reference Ch : L
1c1.Fine Channel Level
Ref.Ch Level : 0.0 dB
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
R <=> L
L : 0.0 dB
1c1.Fine Channel Level
R : 0.0 dB
C : 0.0 dB
SR : 0.0 dB
SL : 0.0 dB
SBL : 0.0 dB
SBR : 0.0 dB
SW : 0.0 dB
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 82
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
83
En
1 Select Fine SP Distance from the
Manual MCACC setup menu.
2 Adjust the distance of the left channel
from the listening position.
3 Select each channel in turn and adjust the
distance as necessary.
Use / to adjust the delay of the speaker
you selected to match the reference speaker.
The delay is measured in terms of speaker
distance from 0.01m to 9.00m.
Listen to the reference speaker and use it to
measure the target channel. From the listening
position, face the two speakers with your arms
outstretched pointing at each speaker. Try to
make the two tones sound as if they are
arriving simultaneously at a position slightly in
front of you and between your arm span.
1
When it sounds like the delay settings are
matched up, press to confirm and continue
to the next channel.
For comparison purposes, the reference
speaker will change depending on which
speaker you select.
If you want to go back and adjust a
channel, simply use / to select it.
4 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
Note
1 If you cant seem to achieve this by adjusting the distance setting, you may need to change the angle of your
speakers very slightly.
For better audibility, the subwoofer emits a continuous test tone (oscillating pulses are heard from your other
speakers). Note that it may be difficult to compare this tone with the other speakers in your setup (depending on the
low frequency response of the reference speaker).
1. Fi ne Channel Level
2. Fi ne SP Di stance
3. Standi ng Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Pr of essi onal
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Reference Ch : L
1c2.Fine SP Distance
Ref.Ch Distance : 3.61m
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
R <=> L
L : 3.61m
1c2.Fine SP Distance
R : 3.67m
C : 3.69m
SR : 2.74m
SL : 2.26m
SBL : 5.13m
SBR : 5.77m
SW : 3.54m
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 83
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
84
En
Standing Wave
Default setting: ON
1
/ATT 0.0dB (all filters)
Acoustic standing waves occur when, under
certain conditions, sound waves from your
speaker system resonate mutually with sound
waves reflected off the walls in your listening
area. This can have a negative effect on the
overall sound, especially at certain lower
frequencies. Depending on speaker placement,
your listening position, and ultimately the
shape of your room, it results in an overly
resonant (boomy) sound. The Standing Wave
Control uses filters to reduce the effect of overly
resonant sounds in your listening area. During
playback of a source, you can customize the
filters used for Standing Wave Control for each
of your MCACC presets.
2
1 Select Standing Wave from the Manual
MCACC setup menu.
2 Adjust the parameters for the Standing
Wave Control.
Filter Channel Select the channel to
which you will apply the filter(s): MAIN (all
except center channel and subwoofer),
Center or SW (subwoofer).
TRIM (only available when the filter channel
above is SW) Adjust the subwoofer
channel level (to compensate for the
difference in output post-filter).
Freq / Q / ATT These are the filter
parameters where Freq represents the
frequency you will be targeting and Q is the
bandwidth (the higher the Q, the narrower
the bandwidth, or range) of the attenuation
(ATT, the amount of reduction to the
targeted frequency).
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Adjust
Default setting: ON
3
/0.0dB (all channels/
bands)
Acoustic Calibration Equalization is a kind of
room equalizer for your speakers (excluding
the subwoofer). It works by measuring the
acoustic characteristics of your room and
neutralizing the ambient characteristics that
can color the original source material
(providing a flat equalization setting). If youre
not satisfied with the adjustment provided in
Automatically setting up for surround sound
(Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic
MCACC (Expert) on page 77, you can also
adjust these settings manually to get a
frequency balance that suits your tastes.
Note
1 You can switch on or off the Standing Wave and Acoustic Calibration EQ feature in the AUDIO PARAMETER menu.
See Setting the Audio options on page 63 for more on this.
2 Since they will be overwritten, you may want to save the standing wave settings made with the Auto MCACC Setup
to another MCACC preset.
Standing Wave control filter settings cannot be changed during playback of sources using the HDMI connection.
When Standing Wave is selected for a MCACC preset memory where STAND.WAVE is set to OFF in the AUDIO
PARAMETER, STAND.WAVE ON is automatically selected.
1. Fi ne Channel Level
2. Fi ne SP Di stance
3. Standi ng Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Pr of essi onal
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
1c3.Standing Wave
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
Fi l ter 1
Freq
[Hz]
Q ATT
[dB]
Fi l ter 2
Freq
[Hz]
Q ATT
[dB]
Fi l ter 3
Freq
[Hz]
Q ATT
[dB]
63 SW
Filter
Channel
0
dB
5
10
16 32 63 125 250 500 1k Hz
10 5.0 120 10 5.0 201 10 +10.0 5.0
TRIM
[dB]
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
3 When EQ Adjust is selected for a MCACC preset memory where EQ is set to OFF in the AUDIO PARAMETER, EQ
ON is automatically selected.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 84
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
85
En
1 Select EQ Adjust from the Manual
MCACC setup menu.
2 Select the channel(s) you want and adjust
to your liking.
Use / to select the channel.
Use / to select the frequency and / to
boost or cut the EQ. When youre finished, go
back to the top of the screen and press to
return to Ch, then use / to select the channel.
The OVER! indicator shows in the display if
the frequency adjustment is too drastic
and might distort. If this happens, bring the
level down until OVER! disappears from
the display.
Tip
Changing the frequency curve of one channel
too drastically will affect the overall balance.
If the speaker balance seems uneven, you
can raise or lower channel levels using test
tones with the TRIM feature. Use / to
select TRIM, then use / to raise or lower
the channel level for the current speaker.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual MCACC setup
menu.
Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
This setup minimizes the unwanted effects of
room reverberation by allowing you to calibrate
your system based on the direct sound coming
from the speakers.
How to use Acoustic Calibration EQ
Professional
If you find that lower frequencies seem overly
reverberant in your listening room (i.e. it
sounds boomy), or that different channels
seem to exhibit different reverb characteristics
(when Type A or Type B shown on the diagrams
on the following applies), select EQ Pro. & S-
Wave (or ALL) for the Auto MCACC setting in
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 77 to
calibrate the room automatically.
Type A: Reverberance of high vs. low
frequencies
Type B: Reverb characteristics for
different channels
If the pattern is as shown above, select the 30-
50ms setting. If not, this setting is not
necessary.
1. Fi ne Channel Level
2. Fi ne SP Di stance
3. Standi ng Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Pr of essi onal
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
63
[Hz]
125
[Hz]
250
[Hz]
500
[Hz]
1k
[Hz]
2k
[Hz]
4k
[Hz]
8k
[Hz]
16k
[Hz]
TRIM
dB
1c4.EQ Adjust
Exi t Fi ni sh
0.0 Ch : L -6.0 -8.0 0.0 +8.5 +3.0 +8.5 0.0 0.0 +3.0
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
Low frequencies
High frequencies
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro
calibration range
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time (in msec)
0 80
160
Front L
Front R
Level
Acoustic Cal. EQ Pro
calibration range
Conventional MCACC
EQ calibration range
Time (in msec)
0 80
160
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 85
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
86
En
Using Acoustic Calibration EQ Professional
1 Select EQ Professional, then press ENTER.
2 Select an option and press ENTER.
Reverb Measurement Use this to
measure the reverb characteristics of your
room.
Reverb View You can check the reverb
measurements made for specified
frequency ranges in each channel.
1
Advanced EQ Setup Use this to select
the time period that will be used for
frequency adjustment and calibration,
based on the reverb measurement of your
listening area. Note that customizing
system calibration using this setup will
alter the settings you made in
Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or
Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 77 and
is not necessary if youre satisfied with
these settings.
3 If you selected Reverb Measurement,
select EQ ON or OFF, and then START.
The following options determine how the
reverb characteristics of your listening area are
displayed in Reverb View:
EQ OFF You will see the reverb
characteristics of your listening area
without the equalization performed by this
receiver (before calibration).
EQ ON You will see the reverb
characteristics of your listening area with
the equalization performed by this receiver
(after calibration).
2
Note that the EQ
response may not appear entirely flat due
to adjustments necessary for your listening
area.
3
When the reverb measurement is finished, you
can select Reverb View to see the results on-
screen. See Professional Calibration EQ
graphical output on page 107 for
troubleshooting information.
Note
1 If the Reverb View procedure is performed after the Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37 or Reverb Measurement operation, depending on the standing wave control setting, differences may
appear on the reverb graph. With the Auto MCACC function, the reverberations are measured with the standing waves
controlled, so the reverb characteristics graph shows the characteristics with the effect of the standing waves
eliminated. By contrast, the Reverb Measurement function measures the reverberations without controlling the
standing waves, so the graph indicates the reverb characteristics including the effect of the standing waves. If you
wish to check the reverb characteristics of the room itself (with the standing waves as such), we recommend using
the Reverb Measurement function.
1. Fi ne Channel Level
2. Fi ne SP Di stance
3. Standi ng Wave
1c.Manual MCACC
4. EQ Adj ust
5. EQ Pr of essi onal
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
a. Rever b Measur ement
b. Reverb Vi ew
c. Advanced EQ Setup
1c5.EQ Professional
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
2 The calibration corresponding to the currently selected MCACC preset will be used when EQ ON is selected. To use
another MCACC preset, exit the HOME MENU and press MCACC to select it before pressing HOME MENU.
3 After auto calibration with EQ Type : SYMMETRY (Full Auto MCACC, etc.), the graph for the inferred reverb
characteristics can be displayed by selecting Reverb View. To display the actually measured reverb characteristics
after EQ calibration, measure with EQ ON.
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
1c5a.Reverb Measurement
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
START
Reverb Measure with : EQ OFF
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 86
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
87
En
4 If you selected Reverb View, you can
check the reverb characteristics for each
channel. Press RETURN when youre done.
The reverb characteristics are displayed when
the Full Auto MCACC or Reverb
Measurement measurements are
conducted.
1
Use / to select the channel, frequency
and calibration setting you want to check. Use
/ to go back and forth between the three.
The reverb characteristics graph before and
after EQ calibration can be displayed by
selecting Calibration : Before / After.
2
Note
that the markers on the vertical axis indicate
decibels in 2 dB steps.
5 If Advanced EQ Setup is selected, select
the MCACC memory to be stored, then enter
the desired time setting for calibration, and
then select START.
Based on the reverb measurement above, you
can choose the time period that will be used for
the final frequency adjustment and calibration.
Even though you can make this setting without
reverb measurement, it is best to use the
measurement results as a reference for your
time setting. For an optimal system calibration
based on the direct sound coming from the
speakers, we recommend using the 30-50ms
setting.
Use / to select the setting. Use / to
switch between them.
Select the setting from the following time
periods (in milliseconds): 0-20ms, 10-30ms,
20-40ms, 30-50ms, 40-60ms, 50-70ms and
60-80ms. This setting will be applied to all
channels during calibration.
When youre finished, select START. It will take
about 2 to 4 minutes for the calibration to finish.
After the Acoustic Calibration Equalization is
set, you are given the option to check the
settings on-screen.
Note
1 The After display when measurements have been made using the Full Auto MCACC or Auto MCACC (ALL) function
shows the graph for the inferred reverb characteristics after EQ Type : SYMMETRY calibration.
2 The reverb characteristics graph is overwritten each time the reverberations are measured. No Data is displayed if
there is no reverb characteristic data, for example before measurements have been taken.
1c5b.Reverb View
Exi t Ret ur n
Channel : Front M1.MEMORY 1
Cal i brati on : After
Frequency : 63Hz SYMMETRY
A/V RECEIVER
dB
53.0
55.0
57.0
59.0
61.0
63.0 16 kHz
8 kHz
4 kHz
2 kHz
1 kHz
500 Hz
250 Hz
125 Hz
63 Hz
0 40 80 120 160 ms
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
START
Time Position : 30-50ms
EQ Type : SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point : NO
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
1c5c.Adv.EQ Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
START
Time Position : 30-50ms
EQ Type : SYMMETRY
STAND.WAVE Multi-Point : NO
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 87
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
88
En
Checking MCACC Data
At the procedure of Automatically setting up for
surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37, the
procedure of Automatic MCACC (Expert) on
page 77 or after fine-adjusting at Manual
MCACC setup on page 81, you can check your
calibrated settings using the GUI screen.
1 Press , then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen appears
on your TV. Use /// and ENTER to
navigate through the screens and select menu
items. Press RETURN to confirm and exit the
current menu.
2 Select MCACC Data Check from the
HOME MENU.
3 Select the setting you want to check.
Speaker Setting Used to check the
settings of the speaker systems. See
Speaker Setting below for more on this.
Channel Level Used to check the output
level of the different speakers. See Channel
Level below for more on this.
Speaker Distance Used to check the
distance to the different speakers. See
Speaker Distance on page 89 for more on
this.
Standing Wave Used to check the
standing wave control filter settings. See
Standing Wave on page 89 for more on this.
Acoustic Cal EQ Used to check the
calibration values of the listening
environments frequency response. See
Acoustic Cal EQ on page 89 for more on
this.
4 Press RETURN to go back to MCACC Data
Check menu, repeating steps 2 and 3 to check
other settings.
5 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the HOME MENU.
Speaker Setting
Use this to display the speaker size and
number of speakers. See Speaker Setting on
page 94 for more on this.
1 Select Speaker Setting from the MCACC
Data Check menu.
2 Select the channel you want to check.
Use / to select the channel. The
corresponding channel on the layout diagram
is highlighted.
Channel Level
Use this to display the level of the various
channels. See Channel Level on page 95 for
more on this.
RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Dat a Check
3. Dat a Management
4. Syst em Set up
Exi t Ret ur n
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
a. Speaker Set t i ng
b. Channel Level
c. Speaker Di stance
2.MCACC Data Check
d. St andi ng Wave
e. Acoust i c Cal EQ
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Front : LARGE
Surr : SMALL
Center : SMALL
2a.Speaker Setting
SB : SMALL x 2
SW : YES
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 88
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
89
En
1 Select Channel Level from the MCACC
Data Check menu.
2 When MCACC is highlighted, use /
to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
The level of the various channels set at the
selected MCACC preset is displayed. --- is
displayed for channels that are not connected.
Speaker Distance
Use this to display the distance from the
different channels to the listening position. See
Speaker Distance on page 96 for more on this.
1 Select Speaker Distance from the
MCACC Data Check menu.
2 When MCACC is highlighted, use /
to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
The distance from the various channels set at
the selected MCACC preset is displayed. --- is
displayed for channels that are not connected.
Standing Wave
Use this to display the standing wave related
adjustment values for the various MCACC
memories. See Standing Wave on page 84 for
more on this.
1 Select Standing Wave from the MCACC
Data Check menu.
2 When Filter Channel is highlighted, use
/ to select the channel for which you
want to check standing wave control.
The standing wave related calibration value for
the selected channel stored at the selected
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.
3 Press to highlight MCACC, then use
/ to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
Acoustic Cal EQ
Use this to display the calibration values for the
frequency response of the various channels set
in the different MCACC presets. See Acoustic
Calibration EQ Adjust on page 84 for more on
this.
1 Select Acoustic Cal EQ from the MCACC
Data Check menu.
2 When Ch is highlighted, use / to
select the channel.
The calibration value for the frequency response
of the selected channel stored at the selected
MCACC preset and its graph are displayed.
3 Press to highlight MCACC, then use
/ to select the MCACC preset you want to
check.
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L : 0.0 dB
2b.Channel Level
C : 0.0 dB
R : 0.0 dB
SBR : 0.0 dB
SR : 0.0 dB
SBL : 0.0 dB
SL : 0.0 dB
SW : 0.0 dB
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
L : 3.61m
2c.Speaker Distance
C : 3.69m
R : 3.51m
SBR : 5.77m
SR : 2.74m
SBL : 5.13m
SL : 2.26m
SW : 3.54m
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
2d.Standing Wave
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Fi l ter 1
Freq
[Hz]
Q ATT
[dB]
Fi l ter 2
Freq
[Hz]
Q ATT
[dB]
Fi l ter 3
Freq
[Hz]
Q ATT
[dB]
63 SW
Filter
Channel
10 5.0 120 10 5.0 201 10 +10.0 5.0
TRIM
[dB]
0
5
10
16 32 63 125 250 500 1k Hz
dB
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
63
[Hz]
125
[Hz]
250
[Hz]
500
[Hz]
1k
[Hz]
2k
[Hz]
4k
[Hz]
8k
[Hz]
16k
[Hz]
TRIM
dB
2e.Acoustic Cal EQ
Exi t Ret ur n
0.0 Ch : L -6.0 -8.0 0.0 +8.5 +3.0 +8.5 0.0 0.0 +3.0
A/V RECEIVER
MCACC
M1.MEMORY1
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 89
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
90
En
Data Management
This system allows you to store up to six
MCACC presets, allowing you to calibrate your
system for different listening positions (or
frequency adjustments for the same listening
position).
1
This is useful for alternate settings
to match the kind of source youre listening to
and where youre sitting (for example,
watching movies from a sofa, or playing a video
game close to the TV).
From this menu you can copy from one preset to
another, name presets for easier identification
and clear any ones you dont need.
1 Press , then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
2 Select Data Management from the
HOME MENU.
3 Select the setting you want to adjust.
Memory Rename Name your MCACC
presets for easy identification (see
Renaming MCACC presets below).
MCACC Memory Copy Copy settings
from one MCACC preset to another (see
Copying MCACC preset data on page 91).
MCACC Memory Clear Clear any
MCACC presets that you dont want (see
Clearing MCACC presets on page 91).
Renaming MCACC presets
If you have several different MCACC presets
that youre using, you may want to rename
them for easier identification.
1 Select Memory Rename from the Data
Management setup menu.
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
rename, then select an appropriate preset
name.
Use / to select the preset, then / to
select a preset name.
3 Repeat for as many MCACC presets as
necessary, then press RETURN when youre
finished.
You will return to the Data Management
setup menu.
Note
1 This can be done in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 77, either of which you should have already completed.
RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Dat a Check
3. Dat a Management
4. Syst em Set up
Exi t Ret ur n
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
a. Memor y Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Cl ear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
a. Memor y Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Cl ear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
MCACC Position Rename
M1 : MEMORY 1
3a.Memory Rename
M2 : MEMORY 2
M3 : MEMORY 3
M4 : MEMORY 4
M5 : MEMORY 5
M6 : MEMORY 6
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 90
The Advanced MCACC menu 10
91
En
Copying MCACC preset data
If you want to manually adjust the Acoustic
Calibration EQ (see Manual MCACC setup on
page 81), we recommend copying your current
settings
1
to an unused MCACC preset. Instead
of just a flat EQ curve, this will give you a
reference point from which to start.
1 Select MCACC Memory Copy from the
Data Management setup menu.
2 Select the setting you want to copy.
All Data Copies all the settings of the
selected MCACC preset memory.
Level & Distance Copies only the channel
level and speaker distance settings of the
selected MCACC preset memory.
3 Select the MCACC preset youll be
copying the settings From, then specify
where you want to copy them (To).
Make sure you dont overwrite an MCACC
preset youre currently using (this cant be
undone).
4 Select OK to confirm and copy the
settings.
When MCACC Memory Copy? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
copied.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
confirm the MCACC preset has been copied,
then you automatically return to the Data
Management setup menu.
Clearing MCACC presets
If you are no longer using one of the MCACC
presets stored in memory, you can choose to
clear the calibration settings of that preset.
1 Select MCACC Memory Clear from the
Data Management setup menu.
2 Select the MCACC preset you want to
clear.
Make sure you dont clear an MCACC preset
youre currently using (this cant be undone).
3 Select OK to confirm and clear the
preset.
When MCACC Memory Clear? is displayed,
select YES. If NO is selected, the memory is not
cleared.
Completed! shows in the GUI screen to
confirm the MCACC preset has been cleared,
then you automatically return to the Data
Management setup menu.
Note
1 The settings made in Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 or Automatic MCACC
(Expert) on page 77.
a. Memor y Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Cl ear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Copy : Al l Dat a
Fr om : M1.MEMORY 1
3b.MCACC Memory Copy
To : M1.MEMORY 1
OK
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
a. Memor y Rename
b. MCACC Memory Copy
c. MCACC Memory Cl ear
3.Data Management
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Cl ear : M1.MEMORY 1
3c.MCACC Memory Clear
OK
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 91
The system and the other setup 11
92
En
Chapter 11:
The system and the other setup
Making receiver settings from
the System Setup menu
The following section describes how to change
the speaker-related settings manually and
make various other settings (input selection,
OSD language selection, etc.).
1 Switch on the receiver and your TV.
Use the C RECEIVER button to switch on.
1
If headphones are connected to the
receiver, disconnect them.
2 Press , then press HOME
MENU.
2
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
Press HOME MENU at any time to exit the
HOME MENU.
3 Select System Setup from the HOME
MENU, then press ENTER.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
Manual SP Setup Sets the type of
connection used for surround back
terminals and the size, number distance
and overall balance of the connected
speakers (see Manual speaker setup on
page 93).
Input Setup Specifies what youve
connected to the digital, HDMI and
component video inputs (see The Input
Setup menu on page 39).
OSD Language The GUI screens display
language can be changed (see Changing
the OSD display language (OSD Language)
on page 36).
Other Setup Makes customized settings
to reflect how you are using the receiver
(see The Other Setup menu on page 97).
Note
1 Make sure not to switch off the power when using the System Setup menu.
2 You cant use the HOME MENU when either the iPod/USB input function is selected or the headphones are
connected. When you set ZONE 2 to ON (page 68), you cant use the HOME MENU.
RECEIVER
1. Advanced MCACC
2. MCACC Dat a Check
3. Dat a Management
4. Syst em Set up
Exi t Ret ur n
HOME MENU
A/V RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
a.Manual SP Set up
b. Input Set up
c. OSD Language
d. Ot her Set up
4.System Setup
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 92
The system and the other setup 11
93
En
Manual speaker setup
This receiver allows you to make detailed
settings to optimize the surround sound
performance. You only need to make these
settings once (unless you change the
placement of your current speaker system or
add new speakers).
These settings are designed to customize your
system, but if youre satisfied with the settings
made in Automatically setting up for surround
sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37, it isnt
necessary to make all of these settings.
CAUTION
The test tones used in the Manual SP Setup
are output at high volume.
1 Select Manual SP Setup, then press
ENTER.
See Making receiver settings from Making
receiver settings from the System Setup menu
on page 92 if youre not already at this screen.
2 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
want to adjust these settings in order:
Surr Back System Specifies how you are
using your surround back speakers (see
below).
Speaker Setting Specifies the size and
number of speakers youve connected
(page 94).
Channel Level Adjusts the overall
balance of your speaker system (page 95).
Speaker Distance Specifies the distance
of your speakers from the listening position
(page 96).
X-Curve Adjusts the tonal balance of
your speaker system for movie soundtracks
(page 97).
3 Make the adjustments necessary for each
setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after
each screen.
Surround back speaker setting
Default setting: Normal
There are several ways you can use the
surround back speaker channels with this
system. In addition to a normal home theater
setup where they are used for the surround
back speakers, they can be used for bi-amping
the front speakers or as an independent
speaker system in another room.
1 Select Surr Back System from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
See Making receiver settings from the System
Setup menu on page 92 if youre not already at
this screen.
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
a.Manual SP Set up
b. Input Set up
c. OSD Language
d. Ot her Set up
4.System Setup
1. Sur r Back Syst em
2. Speaker Setti ng
3. Channel Level
4a.Manual SP Setup
4. Speaker Di st ance
5. X-Cur ve
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
1. Sur r Back Syst em
2. Speaker Setti ng
3. Channel Level
4a.Manual SP Setup
4. Speaker Di st ance
5. X-Cur ve
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Normal
Front : Normal
4a1.Surr Back System
Center : Normal
Surr : Normal
SB : Normal
OK
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 93
The system and the other setup 11
94
En
2 Select the surround back speaker setting.
Normal Select for normal home theater
use with surround back speakers in your
main (speaker system A) setup.
Speaker B Select to use the (surround
back) B speaker terminals to listen to
stereo playback in another room (see
Switching the speaker system on page 68).
Front Bi-Amp Select this setting if youre
bi-amping your front speakers (see Bi-
amping your speakers on page 20).
ZONE 2 Select to use the (surround back)
B speaker terminals for an independent
system in another zone (see Using the
MULTI-ZONE controls on page 68).
3 When Setting Change? is displayed,
select Yes.
If No is selected, the setting is not changed.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Speaker Setting
Use this setting to specify your speaker
configuration (size, number of speakers and
crossover frequency)
1
. It is a good idea to make
sure that the settings made in Automatically
setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on
page 37 are correct. Note that this setting
applies to all MCACC presets, and cannot be
set independently.
1 Select Speaker Setting from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
2 Choose the set of speakers that you want
to set, then select a speaker size.
Use / to select the size (and number) of
each of the following speakers:
2
Front Select LARGE if your front
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively, or if you didnt connect a
subwoofer. Select SMALL to send the bass
frequencies to the subwoofer.
Center Select LARGE if your center
speaker reproduces bass frequencies
effectively, or select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didnt connect a center
speaker, choose NO (the center channel is
sent to the front speakers).
Surr Select LARGE if your surround
speakers reproduce bass frequencies
effectively. Select SMALL to send bass
frequencies to the other speakers or
subwoofer. If you didnt connect surround
speakers choose NO (the sound of the
surround channels is sent to the front
speakers or a subwoofer).
Note
1 If youre using a THX speaker setup, set all speakers to SMALL.
2 If you select SMALL for the front speakers the subwoofer will automatically be fixed to YES. Also, the center, surround
and surround back speakers cant be set to LARGE if the front speakers are set to SMALL. In this case, all bass
frequencies are sent to the subwoofer.
1. Sur r Back Syst em
2. Speaker Setti ng
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Di st ance
5. X-Cur ve
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
Front : LARGE
Surr : SMALL
Center : SMALL
4a2.Speaker Setting
SB : SMALL x 2
SW : YES
X.OVER : 80Hz
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 94
The system and the other setup 11
95
En
SB Select the number of surround back
speakers you have (one, two or none).
1

Select LARGEx2 or LARGEx1 if your
surround back speakers reproduce bass
frequencies effectively. Select SMALLx2 or
SMALLx1 to send bass frequencies to the
other speakers or subwoofer. If you didnt
connect surround back speakers choose
NO.
SW LFE signals and bass frequencies of
channels set to SMALL are output from the
subwoofer when YES is selected. Choose
the PLUS setting if you want the subwoofer
to output bass sound continuously or you
want deeper bass (the bass frequencies
that would normally come out the front and
center speakers are also routed to the
subwoofer).
2
If you did not connect a
subwoofer choose NO (the bass
frequencies are output from other
speakers).
3 Select X. OVER and set the crossover
frequency.
3
Frequencies below this point will be sent to the
subwoofer (or LARGE speakers).
4 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Channel Level
Using the channel level settings, you can
adjust the overall balance of your speaker
system, an important factor when setting up a
home theater system.
1 Select Channel Level from the Manual
SP Setup menu.
2 Select a setup option.
MANUAL Move the test tone manually
from speaker to speaker and adjust
individual channel levels.
AUTO Adjust channel levels as the test
tone moves from speaker to speaker
automatically.
Note
1 If you selected Speaker B, ZONE 2 or Front Bi-Amp (in Surround back speaker setting on page 93) you cant adjust
the surround back settings.
If the surround speakers are set to NO, the surround back speakers will automatically be set to NO.
If you select one surround back speaker only, make sure that speaker is hooked up to the left surround back
terminal.
2 If you have a subwoofer and like lots of bass, it may seem logical to select LARGE for your front speakers and PLUS
for the subwoofer. This may not, however, yield the best bass results. Depending on the speaker placement of your
room you may actually experience a decrease in the amount of bass due low frequency cancellations. In this case, try
changing the position or direction of speakers. If you cant get good results, listen to the bass response with it set to
PLUS and YES or the front speakers set to LARGE and SMALL alternatively and let your ears judge which sounds best.
If youre having problems, the easiest option is to route all the bass sounds to the subwoofer by selecting SMALL for
the front speakers.
3 This setting decides the cutoff between bass sounds playing back from the speakers selected as LARGE, or the
subwoofer, and bass sounds playing back from those selected as SMALL. It also decides where the cutoff will be for
bass sounds in the LFE channel.
If youre using a THX speaker setup, confirm that the crossover frequency is set to 80Hz.
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
1. Sur r Back Syst em
2. Speaker Setti ng
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Di st ance
5. X-Cur ve
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
Test Tone : AUTO
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 95
The system and the other setup 11
96
En
3 Confirm your selected setup option.
The test tones will start after you press ENTER.
4 Adjust the level of each channel using /
.
If you selected MANUAL, use / to switch
speakers. The AUTO setup will output test
tones in the order shown on-screen:
Adjust the level of each speaker as the test tone
is emitted.
1
5 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
You can change the channel levels at any
time by press , then press CH
LEVEL, and then using / on the
remote control.
Speaker Distance
For good sound depth and separation from
your system, you need to specify the distance
of your speakers from the listening position.
The receiver can then add the proper delay
needed for effective surround sound.
1 Select Speaker Distance from the
Manual SP Setup menu.
2 Adjust the distance of each speaker using
/.
You can adjust the distance of each speaker in
0.01 m increments.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Manual SP Setup menu.
Tip
For best surround sound, make sure the
surround back speakers are the same
distance from the listening position.
Note
1 If you are using a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, take the readings from your main listening position and adjust
the level of each speaker to 75 dB SPL (C-weighting/slow reading).
The subwoofer test tone is output at low volumes. You may need to adjust the level after testing with an actual
soundtrack.
CAUTION
Loud t est t ones wi l l be out put .
Pl ease wai t ...**
4a3.Channel Level
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L : 0.00 dB
4a3.Channel Level
C : 0.00 dB
R : 0.00 dB
SBR : 0.00 dB
SR : 0.00 dB
SBL : 0.00 dB
SL : 0.00 dB
SW : 0.00 dB
RECEIVER
1. Sur r Back Syst em
2. Speaker Setti ng
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Di st ance
5. X-Cur ve
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
MCACC : M1.MEMORY 1
L : 3.61m
4a4.Speaker Distance
C : 3.69m
R : 3.67m
SBR : 5.77m
SR : 2.74m
SBL : 5.13m
SL : 2.26m
SW : 3.54m
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 96
The system and the other setup 11
97
En
X-Curve
Most soundtracks mixed for cinema sound too
bright when played back in large rooms. The X-
Curve setting acts as a kind of re-equalization
for home theater listening, and restores proper
tonal balance of movie soundtracks.
1 Select X-Curve from the Manual SP
Setup menu.
2 Choose the X-Curve setting you want.
Use / to adjust the setting. The X-Curve is
expressed as a downwards slope in decibels
per octave, starting at 2 kHz. The sound
becomes less bright as the slope increases (to
a maximum of 3.0dB/oct). Use the following
guidelines to set the X-Curve according to your
room size:
If you select OFF, the frequency curve will
be flat and the X-Curve has no effect.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
The Other Setup menu
The Other Setup menu is where you can make
customized settings to reflect how you are
using the receiver.
1 Press on the remote control,
then press HOME MENU.
A Graphical User Interface (GUI) screen
appears on your TV. Use /// and
ENTER to navigate through the screens and
select menu items. Press RETURN to confirm
and exit the current menu.
2 Select System Setup from the HOME
MENU.
3 Select Other Setup, then press ENTER.
4 Select the setting you want to adjust.
If you are doing this for the first time, you may
want to adjust these settings in order:
KURO LINK Setup Synchronizes this
receiver with your Pioneer component
supporting KURO LINK (see KURO LINK
Setup on page 61).
Multi Ch In Setup Specifies the optional
settings for a multi-channel input (page 98).
ZONE Audio Setup Specifies the volume
setting for a MULTI-ZONE setup (page 98).
Power ON Level Setup Specifies the
volume level set when the power is turned
on (page 99).
Volume Limit Setup Limits the
maximum volume (page 99).
Room size (m
2
)
36 48 60 72 300 1000
X-Curve
(dB/oct)
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
4a.Manual SP Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
1. Sur r Back Syst em
2. Speaker Setti ng
3. Channel Level
4. Speaker Di st ance
5. X-Cur ve
RECEIVER
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
a.Manual SP Set up
b. Input Set up
c. OSD Language
d. Ot her Set up
4.SystemSetup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 97
The system and the other setup 11
98
En
Remote Control Mode Setup Sets this
receivers remote control mode (page 100).
Flicker Reduction Adjusts the way the
GUI screen looks (page 100).
5 Make the adjustments necessary for each
setting, pressing RETURN to confirm after
each screen.
Multi Channel Input Setup
You can adjust the level of the subwoofer for a
multi-channel input. Also, when the multi-
channel input is selected as an input function,
you can display the video images of other input
functions. In the Multi Channel Input Setup,
you can assign a video input to the multi-
channel input.
1 Select Multi Ch In Setup from the Other
Setup menu.
2 Select the SW Input Gain setting you
want.
0dB Outputs sound of the subwoofer at
the level originally recorded on the source.
+10dB Outputs sound of the subwoofer
at the level increased by 10 dB.
3 Select the Video Input setting you want.
When the multi-channel input is selected as an
input function, you can display the video
images of other input functions. The video
input can be selected from the following: DVD,
TV/SAT, DVR, VIDEO, OFF.
4 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
ZONE Audio Setup
If youve made MULTI-ZONE connections (see
Using the MULTI-ZONE controls on page 68),
you may need to specify your volume setting.
1 Select ZONE Audio Setup from the
Other Setup menu.
2 Select the volume level setting of ZONE 2.
1
Variable Use this setting if youve
connected a power amplifier in the sub
room (this receiver is simply being used as
a pre-amp) and you will be using this
receivers controls to adjust the volume.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
SW Input Gai n : 0dB
Vi deo Input : DVD
Note
1 If you selected ZONE 2 in the Surround back speaker setting on page 93, you wont be able to change the volume level.
4d2.Multi Ch In Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
SW Input Gai n : +10dB
Vi deo Input : DVD
2. Multi Ch In Setup
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
4d3.ZONE Audio Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
ZONE 2 Volume Level : Variable
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 98
The system and the other setup 11
99
En
Fixed Use this setting if youve connected
a fully integrated amplifier (such as
another Pioneer VSX receiver) in the sub
room and want to use that receivers
volume controls.
With the Fixed setting, the source is sent from
this receiver at maximum volume, so make
sure the volume is quite low in the sub zone at
first, and then experiment to find the correct
level.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Power ON Level Setup
The volume can be set so that it is always set to
the same level when the receivers power is
turned on.
1 Select Power ON Level Setup from the
Other Setup menu.
2 Select the Power ON Level setting you
want.
LAST When the power is turned on, the
volume is set to the same level as when the
power was last turned off.
--- When the power is turned on, the
volume is set to minimum level.
-80.0dB to +12.0dB Specify the volume to
be set when the power is turned, in steps of
0.5 dB.
It is not possible to set a volume level greater
than the value specified at Volume Limit Setup.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Volume Limit Setup
Use this function to limit the maximum
volume. The volume cannot be increased
above the level set here, even by operating
MASTER VOLUME button (or the dial on the
front panel).
1 Select Volume Limit Setup from the
Other Setup menu.
2 Select the Volume Limit setting you want.
OFF The maximum volume is not limited.
-20.0dB/-10.0dB/0.0dB The maximum
volume is limited to the value set here.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d4.Power ON Level Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
Power ON Level : LAST
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d5.Volume Limit Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
Volume Limit : OFF
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 99
The system and the other setup 11
100
En
Remote Control Mode Setup
Default setting: 1
This sets this receivers remote control mode to
prevent erroneous operation when multiple
units of the receiver are being used.
1
1 Select Remote Control Mode Setup
from the Other Setup menu.
2 Select the Remote Control Mode setting
you want.
3 Select OK to change the remote control
mode.
4 Follow the instructions on the screen to
change the remote controls setting.
See Operating multiple receivers on page 72.
5 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Flicker Reduction Setup
Default setting: 4
The GUI screens resolution can be increased.
If you feel the GUI screen is hard to see, try
changing this setting. Note that the resolution
in this setting only affects the GUI screen; it
has no influence on the video output.
1 Select Flicker Reduction Setup from the
Other Setup menu.
2 Select the Flicker Reduction setting you
want.
3 When youre finished, press RETURN.
You will return to the Other Setup menu.
Note
1 If you change this receivers setting, also change the setting on the remote control.
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d6.Remote Control Mode Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Cancel
Remote Control Mode : 1
OK
4d.Other Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Ret ur n
3. ZONE Audio Setup
4. Power ON Level Setup
5. Volume Limit Setup
6. Remote Control Mode Setup
7. Flicker Reduction Setup
2. Multi Ch In Setup
1. KURO LINK Setup
4d7.Flicker Reduction Setup
A/V RECEIVER
Exi t Fi ni sh
Flicker Reduction : 4
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 100
Additional information 12
101
En
Chapter 12:
Additional information
Troubleshooting
Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is
something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in
another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the
trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer
authorized independent service company to carry out repair work.
Note
If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity
disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating
conditions.
Power
Symptom Remedy
The power does not turn on. Make sure that the power cord is plugged in to an active power outlet.
Try disconnecting from the power outlet, then plugging back in.
Power cannot be turned off.
(ZONE 2 ON is displayed.)
Set the remote controls MULTI-ZONE operation selector switch to ZONE 2,
then press C RECEIVER to switch the ZONE 2 off.
The receiver suddenly
switches off or the PHASE
CONTROL indicator blinks.
Check that there are no loose strands of speaker wire touching the rear panel
or another set of wires. If so, re-attach the speaker wires, making sure there are
no stray strands.
The receiver may have a serious problem. Disconnect from the power and call
a Pioneer authorized independent service company.
During loud playback the
power suddenly switches off.
Turn down the volume.
Lower the 63 Hz and 125 Hz equalizer levels in the Manual MCACC setup on
page 81.
Switch on the digital safety feature. While holding down ENTER on the front
panel, press C STANDBY/ON to set this receiver to the standby mode. Use
TUNE +/ to select D.SAFETY <OFF>, and then use PRESET +/ to select 1 or
2 (select D.SAFETY <OFF> to deactivate this feature). If the power switches
off even with 2 switched on, turn down the volume. With 1 or 2 on, some
features may be unavailable.
The unit does not respond
when the buttons are
pressed.
Try switching the receiver off, then back on again.
Try disconnecting the power cord, then connect again.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 101
Additional information 12
102
En
No sound
AMP ERR blinks in the
display, then the power
automatically switches off.
The ADVANCED MCACC
blinks and the power does
not turn on.
The receiver may have a serious problem. Do not try switching the receiver
on. Contact a Pioneer authorized independent service company for help.
Power indicator flashes and
power turns off.
There is a problem with the receivers power unit or fan. Try turning on the
power after 1 minute. If the same thing happens, the receiver is damaged.
Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a Pioneer authorized independent
service company. (Other symptoms may appear when the power is turned on.)
AMP OVERHEAT and the
power indicator flash and the
power turns off.
Allow the unit to cool down in a well-ventilated place before switching back
on.
Wait at least 1 minute, then try turning the power on again.
The Receiver suddenly power
off or the blue indicator at the
center of the receiver flashes.
The power unit is damaged. Unplug the receiver from the wall and call a
Pioneer authorized independent service company.
Symptom Remedy
No sound is output when an
input function is selected.
No sound output from the
front speakers.
Check the volume, mute setting (press MUTE) and speaker setting (press
SPEAKERS).
Make sure the correct input function is selected.
Check that the MCACC setup microphone is disconnected.
Make sure the correct input signal is selected (press SIGNAL SEL). Note that
when PCM is selected, you wont be able to hear any other signal format.
Check that the source component is connected properly (see Connecting
your equipment on page 14).
Check that the speakers are connected properly (see Connecting the speakers
on page 18).
No sound from the surround
or center speakers.
Check that the Stereo listening mode or the Front Stage Surround Advance
mode isnt selected; select one of the surround listening modes (see Listening
in surround sound on page 52).
Check that the surround/center speakers are not set to NO (see Speaker
Setting on page 94).
Check the channel level settings (see Channel Level on page 95).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
No sound from surround
back speakers.
Check that the surround back speakers are set to LARGE or SMALL (see
Speaker Setting on page 94).
Make sure surround back channel processing is set to SBch ON (see Using
surround back channel processing on page 55).
If the source is Dolby Surround EX or DTS-ES with no flag to indicate 6.1
compatibility, then with surround back channel processing set to SBch Auto,
there will be no sound from the surround back speakers. In this case, set to
SBch ON (see Using surround back channel processing on page 55).
Symptom Remedy
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 102
Additional information 12
103
En
No sound from surround
back speakers.
(Continued)
If the source does not have 6.1 playback channels, make sure that surround
back channel processing is set to SBch ON and a surround mode is selected
(see Listening in surround sound on page 52).
Check the speaker connections (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
If only one surround back speaker is connected, make sure its connected to
the left channel speaker terminal.
No sound from subwoofer. Check that the subwoofer is connected properly, switched on and the volume
turned up.
If your subwoofer has a sleep function, make sure it is switched off.
Make sure that the Subwoofer setting is YES or PLUS (see Speaker Setting on
page 94).
The crossover frequency may be set too low; try setting it higher to match the
characteristics of your other speakers (see Speaker Setting on page 94).
If there is very little low frequency information in the source material, change
your speaker settings to Front: SMALL / Subwoofer: YES, or Front: LARGE /
Subwoofer: PLUS (see Speaker Setting on page 94).
Check that the LFE channel is not set to OFF, or a very quiet setting (see
Setting the Audio options on page 63).
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 95).
No sound from one speaker. Check the speaker connection (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
Check the speaker level settings (see Channel Level on page 95).
Check that the speaker hasnt been set to NO (see Speaker Setting on
page 94).
The channel may not be recorded in the source. By using one of the advanced
effect listening mode, you may be able to create the missing channel (see
Listening in surround sound on page 52).
Sound is produced from
analog components, but not
from digital ones (DVD, LD,
CD-ROM, etc.).
Check that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
signal on page 57).
Make sure that the digital input is assigned correctly for the input jack the
component is connected to (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).
Check the digital output settings on the source component.
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
turned down.
Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are not selected. Select any
other input function.
No sound is output or a noise
is output when Dolby Digital/
DTS software is played back.
Check that your DVD player is compatible with Dolby Digital/DTS discs.
Check the digital output settings of your DVD player. Make sure that the DTS
signal output is set to On.
If the source component has a digital volume control, make sure this is not
turned down.
No sound when using the
HOME MENU.
If the HDMI input function is selected, sound is muted until exiting the HOME
MENU.
Symptom Remedy
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 103
Additional information 12
104
En
Other audio problems
Symptom Remedy
Broadcast stations cannot be
selected automatically, or
there is considerable noise in
radio broadcasts.
For FM broadcasts
Fully extend the FM wire antenna, adjust the position for best reception and
secure to a wall, etc.
Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).
For AM broadcasts
Adjust the position and direction of the AM antenna.
Use an outdoor antenna for better reception (see page 30).
Noise may be caused by interference from other equipment, such as a
fluorescent light, motor, etc. Switch off or move the other equipment, or move
the AM antenna.
A multichannel DVD source
appears to be downmixed to
2 channels during playback.
Make sure that the multichannel analog inputs are selected (see Selecting the
multichannel analog inputs on page 42).
Noise is output when
scanning a DTS CD.
This is not a malfunction of the receiver. The scan function of your player
alters the digital information, making it unreadable, resulting in noise being
output. Lower the volume when scanning.
When playing a DTS format
LD there is audible noise on
the soundtrack.
Make sure that the input signal type is set to DIGITAL (see Choosing the input
signal on page 57).
Cant record audio. You can only make a digital recording from a digital source, and an analog
recording from an analog source.
For digital sources, make sure that what youre recording isnt copy protected.
Check that the OUT jacks are properly connected to the recorders input jacks
(see Connecting other audio components on page 29).
Subwoofer output is very low. To route more signal to the subwoofer, set it to PLUS or set the front speakers
to SMALL (see Speaker Setting on page 94).
Everything seems to be set up
correctly, but the playback
sound is odd.
The speakers may be out of phase. Check that the positive/negative speaker
terminals on the receiver are matched with the corresponding terminals on the
speakers (see Connecting the speakers on page 18).
The PHASE CONTROL
feature doesnt seem to have
an audible effect.
If applicable, check that the lowpass filter switch on your subwoofer is off, or
the lowpass cutoff is set to the highest frequency setting. If there is a PHASE
setting on your subwoofer, set it to 0 (or depending on the subwoofer, the
setting where you think it has the best overall effect on the sound).
Make sure the speaker distance setting is correct for all speakers (see Speaker
Distance on page 96).
Noise or hum can be heard
even when there is no sound
being input.
Check that personal computers or other digital components connected to the
same power source are not causing interference.
There seems to be a time lag
between the speakers and
the output of the subwoofer.
See Automatically setting up for surround sound (Auto MCACC) on page 37 to
set up your system again using MCACC (this will automatically compensate for
a delay in the subwoofer output).
The maximum volume
available (shown in the front
panel display) is lower than
the +12dB maximum.
Check that the Volume Limit is set to OFF (see Volume Limit Setup on
page 99).
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 104
Additional information 12
105
En
Video
Symptom Remedy
No image is output when an
input is selected.
Check the video connections of the source component (see page 28).
For HDMI, or when digital video conversion is set to OFF and a TV and another
component are connected with different cords (in Setting the Video options on
page 66), you must connect your TV to this receiver using the same type of video
cable as you used to connect your video component.
Make sure the input assignment is correct for components connected using
component video or HDMI cables (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).
Check the video output settings of the source component.
Check that the video input you selected on your TV is correct.
Some components (such as video game units) have resolutions that may not
be converted. If adjusting this receivers Resolution setting (in Setting the Video
options on page 66) and/or the resolution settings on your component or
display doesnt work, try switching Digital Video Conversion (in Setting the Video
options on page 66) OFF.
Cant record video. Check that the source is not copy-protected.
The video converter is not available when making recordings. Check that the
same type of video cable is used for connecting both the recorder and the video
source (the one you want to record) to this receiver.
Noisy, intermittent, or
distorted picture.
Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning,
for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units,
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),
then start playback again.
Video signals are not output
from the component
terminal.
When a monitor only compatible with resolutions of 480i is connected to the
component terminal and another monitor is connected to the HDMI terminal,
the video signals may not be output to the monitor connected to the component
terminal. If this happens, do the following:
Turn off the power of the monitor connected to the HDMI terminal.
VSX-1019AH model: Set RES on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu to PURE
(page 66).
VSX-919AH model: Set IP CONV on the VIDEO PARAMETER menu to OFF
(page 66).
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 105
Additional information 12
106
En
Settings
Symptom Remedy
The Auto MCACC Setup
continually shows an error.
The ambient noise level may be too high. Keep the noise level in the room as
low as possible (see also Problems when using the Auto MCACC Setup on
page 39). If the noise level cannot be kept low enough, you will have to set up
the surround sound manually (page 93).
When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND
BACK L (Single) terminals.
To use a 5.1-channel speaker set, use the surround speakers for the surround
channel, not the surround back channel.
Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.
If Reverse Phase is displayed, try the following:
The speakers wiring (+ and ) may be inverted. Check the speaker
connections.
Depending on the type of speakers and their installation conditions, Reverse
Phase may be displayed even if the speakers are properly connected. If this
happens, select GO NEXT and continue.
If the speaker is not pointed to the microphone (listening position) or when
using speakers that affect the phase (dipole speakers, reflective speakers, etc.),
it may not be possible to properly identify the polarity.
After using the Auto MCACC
Setup, the speaker size
setting is incorrect.
There may have been some low frequency noise in the room from an air-
conditioner, motor, etc. Switch off all other appliances in the room and use
Auto MCACC Setup again.
Depending on a number of factors (room size, speaker placement, etc.) this
may occur in some cases. Change the speaker setting manually in Speaker
Setting on page 94, and use the ALL (Keep SP System) option for the Auto
MCACC menu in Automatic MCACC (Expert) on page 77 if this is a recurring
problem.
Cant adjust the Fine Speaker
Distance setting (page 82)
properly.
Check that the speakers are all in phase (make sure the positive (+) and
negative () terminals are matched up properly).
The display shows KEY LOCK
ON when you try to make
settings.
With the receiver in standby, press C STANDBY/ON while holding down
SPEAKERS to disable the key lock.
Most recent settings have
been erased.
The power cord was disconnected from the wall while adjusting this setting.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 106
Additional information 12
107
En
Professional Calibration EQ graphical output
Display
Symptom Remedy
The EQ response displayed in
the graphical output
following calibration does not
appear entirely flat.
There are cases where the graph does not appear flat (even when selecting
ALL CH ADJ in the Auto MCACC Setup) due to adjustments made to
compensate for room characteristics to achieve optimal sound.
Areas of the graph may appear identical (before and after) when there is little
or no adjustment needed.
The graph may appear to have shifted vertically when comparing before and
after measurements.
EQ adjustments made using
the Manual MCACC setup on
page 81 do not appear to
change the graphical output.
Despite level adjustments being made, the filters used for analysis may not
display these adjustments in the graphical output. However, these adjustments
are taken this into account by the filters dedicated to overall system calibration.
Lower frequency response
curves do not seem to have
been calibrated for SMALL
speakers.
Low frequencies used in bass management (the subwoofer channel) will not
change for speakers that have been specified as SMALL in the configuration,
or do not output these frequencies.
Calibration is performed, but due to your speakers low frequency limitations,
no measurable sound is output for display.
Symptom Remedy
The display is dark or off. Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
After making an adjustment
the display goes off.
Press DIMMER repeatedly to select a different brightness.
You cant get DIGITAL to
display when using SIGNAL
SEL.
Check the digital connections and make sure that the digital inputs are
assigned correctly (see The Input Setup menu on page 39).
If the multichannel analog inputs are selected, select a different input
function.
2 DIGITAL or DTS does not
light when playing Dolby/DTS
software.
These indicators does not light if playback is paused.
Check the playback (especially the digital output) settings of the source
component.
When playing Dolby Digital
or DTS sources, the receivers
format indicators do not light.
Check that the player is connected using a digital connection.
Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the
input signal on page 57).
Check that the player isnt set up so that Dolby Digital and DTS sources are
converted to PCM.
Ensure that if there are several audio tracks on the disc, the Dolby Digital or
DTS is selected.
When playing certain discs,
none of the receivers format
indicators light.
The disc may not contain 5.1/6.1 channel material. Check the disc packaging
for more on what audio tracks are recorded on the disc.
When playing a disc with the
listening mode set to Auto
Surround or ALC, 2 PL II or
Neo:6 appear on the receiver.
Make sure that the receiver is set to AUTO or DIGITAL (see Choosing the
input signal on page 57).
If a two channel soundtrack is currently playing (including Dolby Surround
encoded), then this is not a malfunction. Check the disc packaging for details
about the audio tracks available.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 107
Additional information 12
108
En
Remote control
During playback of a
Surround EX or DTS-ES
source on the SBch AUTO
setting, EX or ES does not
appear, or the signal is not
properly processed.
The source may be Dolby Surround EX/DTS-ES software, but it has no flag to
indicate it is 6.1 compatible. Set to SBch ON (see Using surround back channel
processing on page 55), then switch to the Standard EX listening mode (see
Listening in surround sound on page 52).
During playback of DVD-
Audio, the display shows
PCM.
This will occur when playing DVD-Audio material over the HDMI connection.
This is not a malfunction.
The power turns off
automatically and some
indicator flashes, or some
indicator flashes and the
power does not turn on.
See the Power section (page 101).
Symptom Remedy
Cannot be remote controlled. Set a 5-digit preset code corresponding to the receiver to be operated in the
remote control (see Operating multiple receivers on page 72).
Check whether the receivers remote control mode is properly set (see
Remote Control Mode Setup on page 100).
Try replacing the batteries in the remote control (see Loading the batteries on
page 7).
Be sure to operate within 7 m and a 30 angle of the remote sensor on the
front panel (see Operating range of remote control unit on page 13).
Check that there are no obstacles between the receiver and the remote
control.
Make sure that there is no fluorescent or other strong light shining on to the
remote sensor.
Check the connections of the CONTROL IN jack (see Operating other Pioneer
components with this units sensor on page 32).
Other components cant be
operated with the system
remote.
If the battery ran down, the preset codes may have been cleared. Re-enter the
preset codes.
The preset code may be incorrect. Redo the procedure for entering preset
codes.
Symptom Remedy
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 108
Additional information 12
109
En
HDMI
Symptom Remedy
The HDMI indicator blinks
continuously.
Check all the points below.
No picture or sound. This receiver is HDCP-compatible. Check that the components you are
connecting are also HDCP-compatible. If they are not, please connect them
using the component or composite video jacks.
Depending on the connected source component, its possible that it will not
work with this receiver (even if it is HDCP-compatible). In this case, connect
using the component or composite video jacks between source and receiver.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly
to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact
the manufacturer for support.
If video images do not appear on your TV or flat screen TV, try adjusting the
resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.
If NOT SUPPORT appears in the receivers display, try adjusting the
resolution, DeepColor or other setting for your component.
While analog video signals are being output over HDMI, use a separate
connection for audio output.
When this receiver reproduces MULTI CH IN audio sources with the HDMI
setting set to THROUGH, you cannot hear audio output from all channels. In
this case, make a digital or analog audio connection.
To output signals in DeepColor, use an HDMI cable (High Speed HDMI
Cable) to connect this receiver to a component or TV with the DeepColor
feature.
No picture. Try changing the Resolution setting (in Setting the Video options on page 66).
No sound, or sound suddenly
ceases.
Check that the HDMI AV setting is set to AMP/THROUGH.
If the component is a DVI device, use a separate connection for the audio.
If analog video is being output over HDMI, please use a separate connection
for the audio.
Check the audio output settings of the source component.
Noisy or distorted picture. Sometimes a video deck may output a noisy video signal (during scanning,
for example), or the video quality may just be poor (with some video game units,
for example). The picture quality may also depend on the settings, etc. of your
display device. Switch off the video converter and reconnect the source and
display device using the same type of connection (component or composite),
then start playback again.
If the problem still persists when connecting your HDMI component directly
to your monitor, please consult the component or monitor manual or contact
the manufacturer for support.
HDCP ERROR shows in the
display.
Check whether or not the connected component is compatible with HDCP. If
it is not compatible with HDCP, reconnect the source device using a different
type of connection (component or composite). Some components that are
compatible with HDCP still cause this message to be displayed, but so long as
there is no problem with displaying video, this is not a malfunction.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 109
Additional information 12
110
En
Important information regarding the HDMI connection
There are cases where you may not be able to route HDMI signals through this receiver (this
depends on the HDMI-equipped component you are connectingcheck with the manufacturer for
HDMI compatibility information).
If you arent receiving HDMI signals properly through this receiver (from your component), please
try one of the following configurations when connecting up.
Configuration A
Use component video cables to connect the
video output of your HDMI-equipped
component to the receivers component video
input. The receiver can then convert the analog
component video signal to a digital HDMI
signal for transmission to the display. For this
configuration, use the most convenient
connection (digital is recommended) for
sending audio to the receiver. See the
operating instructions for more on audio
connections.
Note
The picture quality will change slightly
during conversion.
Configuration B
Connect your HDMI-equipped component
directly to the display using an HDMI cable.
Then use the most convenient connection
(digital is recommended) for sending audio to
the receiver. See the operating instructions for
more on audio connections. Set the display
volume to minimum when using this
configuration.
Note
If your display only has one HDMI terminal,
you can only receive HDMI video from the
connected component.
Depending on the component, audio
output may be limited to the number of
channels available from the connected
display unit (for example audio output is
reduced to 2 channels for a monitor with
stereo audio limitations).
If you want to switch the input function,
youll have to switch functions on both the
receiver and your display unit.
Since the sound is muted on the display
when using the HDMI connection, you
must adjust the volume on the display
every time you switch input functions.
Amp-linked operation not
possible using KURO LINK
function.
Check the HDMI connections.
The cable may be damaged.
Select ON for the KURO LINK setting (see KURO LINK Setup on page 61).
Turn the TVs power on before turning on this receivers power.
Set the TV side KURO LINK setting to ON.
Symptom Remedy
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 110
Additional information 12
111
En
USB interface
If the problem is not solved after the troubleshooting above, if the screen freezes unexpectedly or
if the buttons on the remote control or front panel stop working completely, do the following:
Press C STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn off the power, then turn the power back on.
If the power cannot be turned off, press and hold C STANDBY/ON on the front panel for over
10 seconds. The power will turn off. (In this case, the various settings made on the receiver may
be cleared.)
Symptoms Causes Remedies
The folders/files stored on
a USB memory device are
not displayed.
The folders/files are currently stored
in a region other than the FAT (File
Allocation Table) region.
Store the folders/files in the FAT region.
The number of levels in a folder is
more than 8.
Limit the maximum number of levels in a
folder to 8 (page 45).
There are more than 30 000 folders/
files stored in a USB memory device.
Limit the maximum number of folders/files
stored in a USB memory device to 30 000
(page 45).
The audio files are copyrighted. Copyrighted audio files stored on a USB
memory device cannot be played back
(page 45).
A USB memory device is
not recognized.
The USB memory device does not
support the mass storage class
specifications.
Try using a USB memory device compatible
with the mass storage class specifications.
Note that there are cases where even the
audio files stored on a USB memory device
compatible with the mass storage class
specifications are not played back on this
receiver (page 45).
Connect the USB memory device and
switch on this receiver (page 34).
A USB hub is currently being used. This receiver does not support a USB hub
(page 45).
This receiver recognizes the USB
memory device as a fraud.
Switch off and on again this receiver.
A USB memory device is
connected and displayed,
but the audio files stored
on the USB memory
device cannot be played
back.
Some formats of a USB memory
device, including FAT 12, NTFS, and
HFS, cannot be played back on this
receiver.
Check whether the format of your USB
memory device is either FAT 16 or FAT 32.
Note that the FAT 12, NTFS, and HFS
formats cannot be played back on this
receiver (page 45).
The file format cannot be properly
played back on this receiver.
See the list of file formats that can be played
back on this receiver (page 48).
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 111
Additional information 12
112
En
Surround sound formats
Below is a brief description of the main
surround sound formats youll find on DVDs,
satellite, cable and terrestrial broadcasts, and
video cassettes.
Dolby
The Dolby technologies are explained below.
See www.dolby.com for more detailed
information.
Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, Surround EX and
the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS
The DTS technologies are explained below. See
www.dtstech.com for more detailed
information.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent
#s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,226,616; 6,487,535; 7,212,872; 7,333,929;
7,392,195; 7,272,567 & other U.S. and worldwide
patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered
trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD
and DTS-HD Master Audio are trademarks of
DTS, Inc. 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional (WMA9
Pro) is a discrete surround format developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.
About iPod
Made for iPod means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPod and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Works with iPhone means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPhone and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries. iPhone is a
trademark of Apple Inc.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 112
Additional information 12
113
En
About Neural THX Surround
Neural-THX

Surround is taking surround sound to the


next level. This revolutionary new technology delivers the
rich envelopment and discrete image detail of surround
sound in a format that is fully compatible with stereo from
various content sources. Neural-THX Surround enables 5.1,
6.1 and 7.1-channel support for gaming, movies and digital
music. By unmasking the audio details, typically lost by
other playback modes, audiences will experience the deep
ambience and subtle details of movies, music and games.
Neural-THX

Digital Music is a new surround mode


specifically designed to enhance the playback of
compressed digital music content. It provides listeners
with an expanded sound stage and clean surround
experience, even with compressed audio sources such as
MP3s and Internet streams.
Neural-THX Surround has been chosen as the official
surround sound format for TV sports broadcasting, 7.1
games, Music Direct Internet streaming as well as leading
FM/HD radio stations worldwide. And with this technology
being used by sound designers during content creation, as
well as embedded into playback devices, Neural-THX
Surround promises a listening experience that is true to the
original mix.
For additional information, please visit
www.neuralsurround.com.
This product is manufactured under license from Neural
Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. PIONEER Corporation
hereby grants the user a non-exclusive, non-transferable,
limited right of use to this product under USA and foreign
patent, patent pending and other technology or trademarks
owned by Neural Audio Corporation and THX Ltd. Neural
Surround, Neural Audio, Neural and NRL are
trademarks and logos owned by Neural Audio Corporation,
THX is a trademark of THX Ltd., which may be registered in
some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 113
Additional information 12
114
En
Auto Surround, ALC and Stream Direct with different input signal formats
The following charts show what you will hear with different input signal formats, depending on the
Stream Direct mode (see Using Stream Direct on page 55) you have selected.
Stereo (2 channel) signal formats
Multichannel signal formats
Input signal format
Auto Surround / ALC /
DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE 2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above Stereo playback
DVD-A sources As above As above
SACD sources As above As above
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
Dolby Digital Surround
2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE 2 Pro Logic ll MOVIE
DTS Surround Neo:6 CINEMA Neo:6 CINEMA
Other stereo sources Stereo playback Stereo playback
Analog sources As above ANALOG DIRECT (stereo)
PCM sources As above Stereo playback
DVD-A sources As above As above
SACD sources As above As above
Input signal format Auto Surround / ALC PURE DIRECT / DIRECT
Surround Back speaker(s): Connected
Dolby Digital EX (6.1 channel flagged) Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
a
a.Unavailable with only one surround back speaker connected.
Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
a
DTS-ES (6.1 channel sources/6.1 channel flagged) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete) DTS-ES (Matrix/Discrete)
DTS sources (5.1 channel encoding) DTS+Neo:6 Straight decoding
DTS-HD sources Straight decoding As above
Other 6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above
Other 5.1 channel sources Dolby Digital EX
2 Pro Logic llx MOVIE
a
As above
Surround Back speaker(s): Not connected
DVD-A sources/Multi-ch PCM Straight decoding Straight decoding
SACD sources (5.1 channel encoding) As above As above
Other 5.1/6.1/7.1 channel sources As above As above
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 114
Additional information 12
115
En
Preset code list
You should have no problem controlling a component if you find the manufacturer in this list, but
please note that there are cases where codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the
model that you are using. There are also cases where only certain functions may be controllable
after assigning the proper preset code.
TV
General
Pioneer 10037, 10166, 10679,
11247, 11260, 11398
A.R. Systems 10556, 10037
Accent 10037
Acer 11403
Acoustic Solutions 11523
ADL 11217
Admiral 10093
Aiko 10037, 10092
Aim 10037
Akai 10556, 10037, 10000,
10702, 11675
Akiba 10037
Akito 10037
Akura 10037, 10171, 11498,
11687
Alba 10037, 10587
All-Tel 10865
Allstar 10037
Amstrad 10037, 10000, 10171
Amtron 10000, 10180
Anam 10037, 10180, 10250
Anam National 10037,
10650, 10250
Anitech 10037
Ansonic 10037
AOC 10625, 11365
Ardem 10037
Arena 10037
Aristona 10556, 10037
Asberg 10037
Atlantic 10037
Audiosonic 10037, 10865
Audiovox 10092, 10180,
10451, 10623
Aumark 10060
AVP 10000
Awa 10451
Baird 10037
Basic Line 10556, 10037
Baur 10037
Baysonic 10180
Beaumark 10178
Beko 10037
Bell & Howell 10017, 10154
BenQ 11574
Beon 10037
Bestar 10037
Blue Sky 10556, 10037, 11314
BPL 10037
Bradford 10180
Brandt 10625
Brinkmann 10037
Brionvega 10037
Broksonic 10463
Bush 10556, 10037, 10587,
10661, 11645, 11687, 12053
Byd:sign 11309
Carena 10037
Carrefour 10037
Carver 10054
Cascade 10037
Casio 10037
Cathay 10037
CCE 10037
Celebrity 10000
Centurion 10037
Cineral 10092, 10451
Citizen 10060, 10092, 10180
Clarion 10180
Clarivox 10037
Clatronic 10037
Condor 10037
Conia 11498, 11687
Contec 10037, 10180
Cosmel 10037
Craig 10180
Crosley 10054, 10180
Crown 10037, 10053, 10180,
10672
Crown Mustang 10672
CTX 11756
Curtis Mathes 10047, 10051,
10054, 10060, 10093, 10145,
10154, 10166, 10451
CXC 10180
D-Vision 10556, 10037
Daewoo 10556, 10037,
10092, 10154, 10178, 10451,
10623, 10661, 10865, 11812
Dansai 10037
Dawa 10037
Daytron 10037, 10092, 10178
Decca 10037
Dell 11264, 11403
Denon 10145
Denver 10037, 10587
Desmet 10037
Diamant 10037
Digatron 10037
Digiline 10037
Digimate 10890
Dixi 10037
DMTech 12001
Dream Vision 11704
Dual 10037
Dumont 10017
Dux 10037
Dynatron 10037
Dynex 11463
ECE 10037
Elbe 10556, 10037
Electroband 10000
Electrohome 10463
Element 11687
ELG 10037
Elin 10037
Elite 10037
Emerson 10037, 10017,
10047, 10154, 10178, 10180,
10236, 10463, 10623
Envision 11365
Erres 10037
ESC 10037
Euroman 10037
Europa 10037
Europhon 10037
Evesham 11719
Evolution 11756
Exquisit 10037
Ferguson 10037, 10625,
10053, 12053
Fidelity 10037, 10171
Finlux 10556, 10037
Firstline 10556, 10037
Fisher 10000, 10047, 10054,
10154
Flint 10037
Formenti 10037
Fortress 10093
Fraba 10037
Friac 10037
Fujimaro 10865
Fujitsu 10683, 10809, 10853
Fujitsu General 10683
Funai 10171, 10180, 11394,
11817
Futuretech 10180
Galaxi 10037
Galaxis 10037
Gateway 11755
GE 10047, 10051, 10093,
10178, 10451, 11147
GEC 10037
Genexxa 10037
Gericom 10865, 11217
Gibralter 10017
Go Video 10060
GoldStar 10037, 10178
Goodmans 10556, 10037,
10625, 10000, 10661, 11645,
11687, 11719, 12053
Gradiente 10037, 10053
Granada 10037, 10226
Grandin 10556, 10037, 10865
Grundig 10556, 10037, 10587,
10672, 12053, 12127
Grunpy 10180
H & B 12001
Haier 11748
Hallmark 10178
Hannspree 11351, 12027
Hanseatic 10556, 10037,
10625, 10661
Hantarex 10037, 10865
Hantor 10037
Harman/Kardon 10054
Harsper 10865
Harvard 10180
Harwood 10037
Hauppauge 10037
Havermy 10093
HCM 10037
Highline 10037
Hinari 10037
Hisense 10556, 11314, 12098
Hitachi 10037, 10000, 10047,
10051, 10054, 10145, 10150,
10178, 11484, 11576, 11691
Hitachi Fujian 10150
Hoeher 10865
Hornyphon 10037
HP 11502
Hugoson 10890, 11217
Humax 12057
Hypson 10556, 10037
Hyundai 10865
Iberia 10037
ICE 10037
Iiyama 10890, 11217
Imperial 10037
Indiana 10037
Innowert 10865
Inteq 10017
Interbuy 10037
Interfunk 10037
Internal 10556
Intervision 10037
Irradio 10037
Isukai 10037
ITS 10037
ITV 10037
JCB 10000
JMB 10556
Jubilee 10556
JVC 10650, 10053, 10054,
10093, 10160, 10463, 10683,
10731, 11253, 11428, 12118
Kaisui 10037
Kathrein 10556
KEC 10060, 10180
Kendo 10037
Kiton 10037
Kneissel 10556, 10037
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 115
Additional information 12
116
En
Kolin 11240, 11331, 11610
Kolster 10037
Konig 10037
Konka 10037
Korpel 10037
Kosmos 10037
KTV 10180
L&S Electronic 10865
Lecson 10037
Lenco 10037, 10587
Leyco 10037
LG 10556, 10037, 10017,
10178, 10856, 11178, 11423,
11663, 11768
Liesenk & Tter 10037
Liesenkotter 10037
Lifetec 10037, 10683
Loewe 10037, 10633, 11884
Logik 11217, 11687
Lumatron 10037
Lux May 10037
LXI 10047, 10054, 10154,
10156
M Electronic 10037, 10661
Madison 10037
MAG 11498, 11687
Magnadyne 10054
Magnavox 10054, 11454,
11866
Magnum 10037
Manesth 10037
Manhattan 10037
Marantz 10556, 10037,
10054, 10704, 11398
Mark 10037
Matsui 10556, 10037
Maxent 11755
Mediator 10556, 10037
Medion 10556, 10037, 12001
Megatron 10145, 10178
Memorex 10037, 10060,
10150, 10154, 10178, 10180,
10250, 10463
Mercury 10037
Metronic 10625
Metz 10037, 10587
MGA 10150, 10178
Micromaxx 10037, 12001
Midland 10017, 10047, 10051
Minato 10037
Minoka 10037
Mirai 11852, 12072
Mitsubishi 10556, 10037,
10093, 10150, 10160, 10178
Morgan's 10037
Motorola 10093
MTC 10060, 10092
Multitec 10037
Multitech 10037, 10180
Mx Onda 11498, 11687
Myryad 10556
NAD 10037, 10865
Naiko 10037
Nakimura 10037
NAT 10226
National 10226
NEC 10053, 10704, 11704,
11797
Neckermann 10556, 10037
NEI 10037
Neovia 10865, 11710
Netsat 10037
Neufunk 10556, 10037
New Tech 10556, 10037
Nikkai 10037
Nikko 10178
Norcent 11365
Nordmende 10037, 12129
Normerel 10037
Novatronic 10037
NTC 10092
Okano 10037
Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331,
11610
Onida 10053, 11253
Onwa 10180
Opera 10037
Optimus 10650, 10166, 10250
Orbit 10037
Orion 10556, 10037, 10236,
10463, 12001
Orline 10037
Osaki 10556, 10037
Osio 10037
Osume 10037
Otic 11498, 11687
Otto Versand 10556, 10037,
10226, 10093
Pacific 10556
Packard Bell 11314
Palladium 10556, 10037
Palsonic 10037
Panama 10037
Panasonic 11480, 10037,
10650, 10226, 10051, 10054,
10156, 10236, 10250, 10853,
11271, 11310, 11636, 11650
Panavision 10037
Penney 10047, 10051, 10060,
10156, 10178
Perdio 10037
Perfekt 10037
Petters 10037
Philco 10037, 10054, 10145,
11661
Philips 10556, 10037, 10000,
10017, 10054, 10605, 10690,
11254, 11454, 11506, 11756
Phoenix 10037
Phonola 10556, 10037
Plantron 10037
Playsonic 10037
Polaroid 11498, 11523, 11645,
11687, 11766
Portland 10092
Powerpoint 10037
Prism 10051
Profitronic 10037
Proline 10037, 10625
Proscan 10047
Prosco 10156
Prosonic 10037
Protec 10037
Protech 10037
Proton 10178
ProVision 10556, 10037
Pulsar 10017
Pvision 12001
Pye 10556, 10037
Quadral 10051
Quasar 10051, 10250, 10865
Quelle 10037
R-Line 10037
Radiola 10556, 10037
Radiomarelli 10037
RadioShack 10037, 10047,
10154, 10178, 10180
Radiotone 10037
RCA 10625, 10047, 10051,
10090, 10093, 11147, 11247,
11781
Realistic 10154, 10180
Recor 10037
Rectiligne 10037
Redstar 10037
Reflex 10037
Relisys 10865, 11211, 11645
Remotec 10037, 10093,
10145, 10171, 10250
Revox 10037
RFT 10037
Roadstar 10037
Runco 10017
Saba 10625
Saivod 10037
Sampo 11755
Samsung 10556, 10037,
10587, 10060, 10090, 10178,
10702, 10766, 10812, 10814,
11060, 11235, 11619, 12051
Sansui 10037, 10463
Sanyo 10037, 10000, 10047,
10154, 10704
Sanyong 10037
SBR 10556, 10037
Schneider 10556, 10037
Scotch 10178
Sears 10047, 10054, 10154,
10156, 10171, 10178
SEG 10037
SEI 10037
Sei-Sinudyne 10037
Semivox 10180
Semp 10156
Serino 10093
Sharp 10053, 10093, 10818,
11093, 11393
Shintoshi 10037
Shivaki 10037
Siemens 10037, 10145
Siera 10556, 10037
Silva 10037
Silva Schneider 10037
Silvano 10587
Singer 10037
Sinudyne 10037
SKY 10037
Sliding 10865
Soemtron 10865
Solar Drape 10000
Solavox 10037
Soniko 10037
Sonneclair 10037
Sonoko 10037
Sontec 10037
Sony 10810, 10037, 10000,
10053, 10150, 10154, 11651,
11685
Soundesign 10178, 10180
Soundwave 10037
Squareview 10171
SSS 10180
Standard 10037
Starlite 10037, 10180
Strato 10037
Sunkai 10865
Sunstar 10037
Sunstech 12001
Sunwood 10037
SuperTech 10556, 10037
Supreme 10000
SVA 10587, 10865
Swisstec 10865
Sylvania 10054, 10171,
11394, 11864
Symphonic 10171, 10180
Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331
Sysline 10037
Tandy 10093
Tatung 10037, 11719, 11756
TCM 12001
Teac 10037, 10171, 10178
Tec 10037
Tech Line 10037
Technics 10556, 10650,
10051, 10250
TechniSat 10556
Technosonic 10556, 10625
Techwood 10051
Tecnimagen 10556
Teknika 10054, 10060, 10092,
10180
Telecor 10037
Telefunken 10037, 10625,
10702
Telefusion 10037
Telegazi 10037
Telemeister 10037
Telesonic 10037
Telestar 10556, 10037
Teletech 10037
Teleview 10037
Tennessee 10037
Tensai 10037
Tevion 10556, 10037, 11498,
11645, 11687
Thomson 10037, 10625,
11447
Thorn 10037
TMK 10178
Tokai 10037
Toshiba 10650, 10060, 10154,
10156, 11156, 11256, 11524,
11656
TRANS-continents 10556,
10037, 10865
Transonic 10037, 10587
Trio 11498, 11687
Triumph 10556, 10037
TVTEXT 95 10556
Uher 10037
Ultravox 10037
Unic Line 10037
United 10037, 10587
Universal 10037
Universum 10037
Univox 10037
V2max 10865
V7 Videoseven 11217, 11755
Vestel 10037
Vexa 10037
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 116
Additional information 12
117
En
Victor 10053, 10160, 10250,
11428
VideoSystem 10037
Vidikron 10054, 11398, 11633
Vidtech 10178
Viewsonic 11755
Vision 10037
Vizio 11758
Vortec 10037
Voxson 10037
Waltham 10037
Wards 10000, 10017, 10047,
10051, 10054, 10060, 10154,
10156, 10166, 10178, 10180,
11147
Watson 10037
Wega 10037
Westinghouse 10885, 10889,
10890
Wharfedale 10556, 10037
White Westinghouse 10037,
10623
Wilson 10556
Windy Sam 10556
World-of-Vision 10865,
10890, 11217
Xenius 10661
Xoro 11217
Xrypton 10037
Yamaha 11576
Yamishi 10037
Yapshe 10250
Yokan 10037
Yoko 10037
Zenith 10017, 10463
Plasma television
Pioneer 10166, 10679, 11247,
11260, 11398, 11633, 14002,
14003, 14004
Akai 11675
All-Tel 10865
CTX 11756
Daewoo 10661, 10865
Dell 11264
Dream Vision 11704
Evolution 11756
Fujimaro 10865
Fujitsu 10683, 10809, 10853
Fujitsu General 10683
Gateway 11755
Gericom 10865
Grandin 10865
Hantarex 10865
Harsper 10865
Hitachi 11484, 11576
Hoeher 10865
Hyundai 10865
Innowert 10865
JVC 10053, 10731
L&S Electronic 10865
LG 10037, 10178, 11423,
11663
Magnavox 11866
Marantz 11398
Maxent 11755
NEC 10704, 11704
Neovia 10865
Panasonic 11480, 10650,
10250, 10853, 11636, 11650
Philips 10556, 10605, 10690,
11756
Quasar 10865
Relisys 10865
Sampo 11755
Samsung 10812, 11619
Sanyo 10704
Sliding 10865
Soemtron 10865
Sony 11651
Sunkai 10865
SVA 10865
Sylvania 11394
Tatung 11756
Tevion 11645
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 10650
Universal 10037
V2max 10865
V7 Videoseven 11755
Viewsonic 11755
Xenius 10661
Yamaha 11576
Zenith 10017
LCD
Acoustic Solutions 11523
ADL 11217
Akai 11675
AOC 10625
BenQ 11574
Blue Sky 11314
Bush 11645, 11687
Byd:sign 11309
Daewoo 10661
Dell 11264
Digatron 10037
Digimate 10890
Element 11687
Envision 11365
Evesham 11719
Funai 11394, 11817
Gericom 10865, 11217
Goodmans 11645, 11687,
11719
Grandin 10865
Grundig 12127
Haier 11748
Hannspree 11351, 12027
Hisense 11314, 12098
Hitachi 11484, 11576
Hoeher 10865
Hugoson 10890, 11217
Humax 12057
Iiyama 10890, 11217
JVC 10053, 11428, 12118
Kolin 11240, 11331, 11610
LG 10037, 10178, 11423,
11663, 11768
Loewe 11884
Logik 11217
Magnavox 11866
Medion 12001
Micromaxx 12001
Mirai 11852, 12072
NAD 10865
NEC 11797
Neovia 10865, 11710
Norcent 11365
Nordmende 12129
Olevia 11144, 11240, 11331,
11610
Orion 12001
Packard Bell 11314
Panasonic 11480, 10650,
11636, 11650
Philips 10556, 10605, 11506
Polaroid 11498, 11523, 11645,
11687, 11766
Relisys 11211, 11645
Samsung 10766, 10812,
10814, 11235, 11619, 12051
Sharp 10818, 11093, 11393
Sliding 10865
Sony 10810, 11651, 11685
Sunkai 10865
SVA 10587, 10865
Swisstec 10865
Sylvania 11864
Syntax 11144, 11240, 11331
Tatung 11719
TCM 12001
Technosonic 10625
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 11524
TRANS-continents 10865
V7 Videoseven 11217
Victor 11428
Vidikron 11398
Vizio 11758
Westinghouse 10885, 10889,
10890
World-of-Vision 10865,
10890, 11217
Xoro 11217
HDTV
Pioneer 10679
Rear Projection TV
Panasonic 11271
Philips 10037
Pye 10037
Sony 11651
Thomson 10625
Toshiba 11524, 11656
TV/DVD
Combination
Akai 11675
Alba 10587
Bush 10587
Daewoo 11812
Denver 10587
DMTech 12001
Goodmans 11687
Grundig 12127
H & B 12001
Lenco 10587
Logik 11687
Philips 10556, 11454
Polaroid 11523, 11766
Pvision 12001
Sunstech 12001
Sylvania 11864
Thomson 10625
United 10587
TV/PVR
Combination
Hitachi 11691
Loewe 11884
TV/VCR
Combination
Amstrad 10171
Broksonic 10463
Curtis Mathes 10051
Emerson 10463
Ferguson 10625
Fidelity 10171
GE 10047, 10051, 10093
GoldStar 10037
Grundig 10556, 10037
LG 10178
Magnavox 10054
Memorex 10250
Mitsubishi 10556, 10093
Orion 10463
Panasonic 10051, 10250
Penney 10051
Philips 10556, 10037
Quasar 10051, 10250
Radiola 10556
RCA 10047, 10051, 10093
Saba 10625
Sansui 10463
Schneider 10556, 10037
Sharp 10093
Siemens 10037
Sony 10000
Sylvania 10054
Teac 10171
Technics 10556
Thomson 10625
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 117
Additional information 12
118
En
DVR/VCR
General
Pioneer 20081, 20067, 20042,
20058, 20162, 22306, 22465,
22466, 22467
A-Mark 20278
Adventura 20000
AEG 21593
Aiko 20278
Aiwa 20037, 20348, 20000,
20032
Akai 20348
Alba 20081, 20278, 20348,
20000
Allstar 20081
America Action 20278
American High 20035
Amstrad 20278, 20000
Anam 20278, 20037, 20226,
20162
Anam National 20226,
20162, 21162
Ansonic 20000
Aristona 20081
ASA 20081, 20037
Astra 20035
Asuka 20081, 20037, 20000,
20038
Audiolab 20081
Audiosonic 20278
Audiovox 20037
AVP 20000
Awa 20037, 20320, 20043
Baird 20278, 20000
Basic Line 20278
Bestar 20278
Black Diamond 20642
Black Panther 20278
Blaupunkt 20081, 20226,
20162
Blue Sky 20278, 20037,
20348, 20642
Brandt 20320
Brinkmann 20348
Bush 20081, 20278, 20348,
20000, 20642
Calix 20037
Canon 20035
Carena 20081
Carrefour 20045
Carver 20081
Casio 20000
Cathay 20278
CCE 20278
Centrum 21593
CGE 20000
Cineral 20278
Citizen 20278, 20037
Clatronic 20000, 21593
Condor 20278
Craig 20037
Crosley 20081
Crown 20278, 20037
Curtis Mathes 20035, 20162
Cyrus 20081
Daewoo 20278, 20642, 20045
Dansai 20278
Daytron 20278
De Graaf 20081, 20042
Decca 20081, 20000, 20067
Degraff 20081, 20042
Deitron 20278
Denon 20081, 20042
Diamant 20037
Dual 20081, 20278, 20348,
20000
Dumont 20081, 20000
Durabrand 20642, 21593
Elbe 20278, 20038
Electrophonic 20037
Elta 20278
Emerex 20032
Emerson 20278, 20037,
20000, 20045, 20043, 20039
ESC 20278
EuroLine 21593
Ferguson 20278, 20348,
20000, 20320, 20084
Fidelity 20000
Finlandia 20081, 20037,
20000, 20043, 20042, 20226
Finlux 20081, 20000, 20042
Firstline 20278, 20037, 20348,
20045, 20043, 20042
Flint 20348
Fuji 20033, 20035
Fujitsu 20037, 20000
Fujitsu Siemens 21972
Funai 20278, 20000, 21593
Galaxi 20000
Galaxis 20278
Garrard 20000
GE 20035, 20060
GEC 20081
General Technic 20348
GoldStar 20037, 20000,
20038, 20225
Goodmans 20081, 20278,
20037, 20348, 20000, 20642
GPX 20037
Gradiente 20000
Granada 20081, 20037,
20000, 20042, 20226, 20035
Grandin 20278, 20037, 20000
Grundig 20081, 20348, 20320,
20226
Hanseatic 20081, 20037,
20038
Harley Davidson 20000
Harman/Kardon 20038
Hewlett Packard 21972
Hinari 20278
Hischito 20045
Hitachi 20081, 20037, 20000,
20042
Hoeher 20278, 20642
Hornyphon 20081
Hughes Network Systems
20042
Hypson 20278, 20037, 20000
Imperial 20000
Interbuy 20037
Interfunk 20081
Internal 20278
International 20278, 20037,
20642
Intervision 20278, 20037,
20348, 20000
Irradio 20081, 20037
ITV 20278, 20037
JBL 20278
JMB 20348
Joyce 20000
JVC 20067, 20084
Karcher 20081, 20278, 20642
KEC 20278, 20037
Kendo 20278, 20037, 20348,
20642
Kenwood 20067, 20038
Kneissel 20278, 20037, 20348
Kodak 20037, 20035
Lenco 20278
LG 20278, 20037, 20000,
20225
Lifetec 20348
Lloyd's 20000
Loewe 20081, 21562, 20037,
20162, 21062, 21162
Luxor 20043
LXI 20037
M Electronic 20037, 20000,
20038
Magnadyne 20081
Magnasonic 20278
Magnavox 20081, 20000,
20035, 20039, 21593
Magnum 20642
Manesth 20081, 20045
Marantz 20081, 20035, 20038
Mark 20278, 20000
Marta 20037
Mascom 20642
Mastec 20642
Master's 20278
Matsui 20037, 20348
Mediator 20081
Medion 20348, 20642
MEI 20035
Memorex 20037, 20348,
20000, 20035, 20039, 20162,
21162
Metronic 20081
Metz 20081, 21562, 20037,
20226, 20162, 21062, 21162
MGA 20043
Micormay 20348
Microsoft 21972
Migros 20000
Minolta 20042
Mitsubishi 20081, 20642,
20067, 20043
Motorola 20035
MTC 20000
Multitec 20037
Multitech 20000
Murphy 20000
Myryad 20081
Naiko 20348, 20642
NAP 20039
National 20226
Nebula Electronics 20033
NEC 20037, 20067, 20038
Neckermann 20081
Nesco 20000
Nikkai 20278
Nikko 20037
Nokia 20081, 20278, 20042
Nordmende 20642, 20320,
20067
Oceanic 20081, 20000, 20320
Okano 20278, 20348
Olympus 20226, 20035
Onimax 20642
Onkyo 20222
Optimus 20058, 20162,
21062, 21162
Orion 20348
Orson 20000
Osaki 20037, 20000
Otto Versand 20081
Pacific 20348, 20000, 20642
Packard Bell 21972
Palladium 20037, 20348
Palsonic 20000
Panama 20035
Panasonic 21562, 20000,
20226, 20035, 20162, 20225,
20616, 21062, 21162, 21244,
21293
Pathe Cinema 20043
Penney 20037, 20042, 20035,
20038
Pentax 20042
Perdio 20000
Philco 20035, 20038
Philips 20081, 20035, 20618
Phoenix 20278
Phonola 20081
Pilot 20037
Portland 20278
Precision 20058
Prinz 20000
Profitronic 20081
Proline 20278, 20000, 20642,
20320
Proscan 20060
Prosco 20278
Prosonic 20278
Protech 20081
ProVision 20278
Pulsar 20039
Pye 20081
Quasar 20278, 20035, 20162,
21162
Quelle 20081
Radialva 20081, 20037
Radiola 20081
Radionette 20037
RadioShack 20037, 20000
Radix 20037
Randex 20037
RCA 20320, 20042, 20035,
20060
Realistic 20037, 20000, 20035
Reoc 20348
Ricavision 21972
Roadstar 20081, 20278,
20037, 20038
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 118
Additional information 12
119
En
Runco 20039
Saba 20278, 20320
Saisho 20348
Salora 20043
Samsung 20045, 20060
Sanky 20039
Sansui 20000, 20067
Sanyo 20067
Saville 20278
SBR 20081
Schaub Lorenz 20348, 20000
Schneider 20081, 20278,
20037, 20348, 20000, 20642,
20042
Scott 20043
Sears 20037, 20000, 20042,
20035
Seaway 20278
SEG 20081, 20278, 20642
SEI 20081
Sei-Sinudyne 20081
Seleco 20037
Semp 20045
Sentra 20278
Sharp 20807
Shivaki 20037
Siemens 20081, 20037, 20320
Siera 20081
Silva 20037
Silver 20278
SilverCrest 20642
Singer 20045
Sinudyne 20081
Smaragd 20348
Sontec 20278, 20037
Sony 20000, 20067, 20032,
20226, 20033, 20035, 20636
Soundwave 20037, 20348
Standard 20278
Stern 20278
STS 20042
Sunkai 20278, 20348
Sunstar 20000
Suntronic 20000
Supra 20037
Susumu 20037
Sylvania 20081, 20000,
20043, 20035
Symphonic 20000, 21593
T+A 20162
Tandberg 20278
Tandy 20000
Tashiko 20081, 20037, 20000
Tatung 20081, 20348, 20000,
20067, 20043
Tchibo 20348
TCM 20348
Teac 20037, 20000, 20642
Technics 20081, 20000,
20226, 20035, 20162, 21162
TechniSat 20348
Teknika 20037, 20000, 20035
Telefunken 20278, 20320
Telerent 20226
Teletech 20278, 20000
Tensai 20278, 20037, 20000
Tevion 20348, 20642
Texet 20278
Thomas 20000
Thomson 20278, 20320,
20067, 20060
Thorn 20037, 20320, 20084
Tisonic 20278
Tivo 20618
Tokai 20037
Topline 20348
Toshiba 20081, 20000, 20045,
20043
Totevision 20037
Tradex 20081
Ultravox 20278
United 20348, 21593
Universum 20081, 20037,
20348, 20000
Vector 20045
Vector Research 20038
VIA Technologies 21972
Victor 20067
Video Concepts 20045
Video Technic 20000
Videomagic 20037
Villain 20000
Wards 20081, 20000, 20045,
20042, 20033, 20035, 20038,
20039, 20058, 20060
Watson 20081, 20642
Weltblick 20037
White Westinghouse 20278
World 20348
XR-1000 20000, 20035
Yamaha 20038
Yamishi 20278
Yoko 20037
Zenith 20000, 20033, 20039
ZX 20348
PVR
Pioneer 22306, 22465, 22466,
22467
Microsoft 21972
Panasonic 20616
Philips 20618
VCR/PVR
Combination
JVC 20067
DVD
General
Pioneer 30571, 30525, 30142,
30631, 30632, 31460, 31571,
32442
3D LAB 30539
4Kus 31158
A-Trend 30714
Acoustic Solutions 30730,
30713, 31228
AEG 30770, 30790, 30675,
30788, 31233
AFK 31051, 31152
AG Electronics 31228
Aim 30778
Airis 30672, 30826, 31005,
31107, 31224, 31321, 31338
Aiwa 30533, 30641
Akai 30790, 30788, 30898,
30899, 31115, 31233
AKI 31005
Akura 30898, 31051, 31140,
31233, 31367
Alba 30539, 30695, 30730,
30672, 30713, 30783, 31140,
31530
Alize 31151
Altacom 31224
Amitech 30770, 30784, 30850
Amoi 30852
Amstrad 30770, 30790,
30713, 31151, 31367
Amuseer 31351
AMW 30872
Ansonic 30831, 30759, 31351
Apex Digital 30672, 30794,
31004
Arena 31115
Aristona 30539, 30646
Asono 31224
Atacom 31224
Audiosonic 30690
Audix 30713
Autovox 30713
Auvio 30843
Axion 30730
Basic Line 30713
Baze 30898
BBK 31224, 31338, 32168
Bellagio 31004
Bellwood 30826
Belson 31086
Black Diamond 30713
Blu:sens 31233, 31321
Blue Nova International
31321
Blue Sky 30695, 30651,
30790, 30672, 30713, 30778,
30843, 31423
Boghe 31004
Boman 30783, 30898, 31005
Brainwave 30770, 31115
Brandt 30503, 30551, 30651
Broksonic 30695
Bush 30730, 30831, 30672,
30690, 30713, 30723, 30733,
30778, 31051, 31128, 31140,
31351, 31367, 31483, 31530
Cambridge Audio 30751
Campomatic Digital 31051
Cat 30789, 31421
CCE 30730
Centrum 30675, 30713,
30779, 30789, 31005, 31227
CGV 30733, 30751, 31115
Cinea 30841
Cinetec 30713, 30872
Classic 30730
Clatronic 30672, 30675,
30788, 31233
Clayton 30713
Coby 30730, 30778, 30852,
31351
Codex 31233
Commax 31321, 31338
Compacks 30826, 31107
Conia 30852
Contel 30788
Continental Edison 30831,
30872
Crown 30770, 30690, 30713,
31115
Crypto 31228
Cybercom 30831
CyberHome 30714, 30816,
30874, 31023, 31502
Cytron 30651, 31347, 31423
D-Vision 31115, 31367
Daenyx 30872
Daewoo 30770, 30714,
30872, 31483
Dalton 31036
Dansai 30770, 30783, 31115
Dantax 30539, 30790, 30713,
30723
Daytek 30872, 31005
Dayton 30872, 31158
DCE 30831
Decca 30770, 31115
Denon 30490, 30634, 31634,
32258
Denver 30672, 30778, 30788,
30898, 31056, 31107, 31321,
31338
Denzel 30665
Desay 30843
Dgtec 30672
Diamond 30651
Digihome 30713
DigiLogic 30713
Digitor 30690
Digitrex 31056
Digix Media 30826
DiK 30831
Dinamic 30788
Disney 30831, 31270
DK Digital 30831, 32095
DMTech 30783
Dragon 30831
DreamX 31151
Dual 30730, 30831, 30651,
30790, 30665, 30713, 30779,
30783, 31023, 31530
Durabrand 30831, 30675,
30713, 31023, 31502, 31530
E:max 31233, 31321
eBench 31152
ECC 30730
Eclipse 30723, 30751
Electrohome 32116
Elfunk 30713, 30850
Elin 30770
Ellion 30850, 31421
Elta 30770, 30672, 30690,
30784, 30788, 30850, 31051,
31115, 31151, 31233
Eltax 31233, 31321
Emerson 30591
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 119
Additional information 12
120
En
Enterprise 30591
Enzer 31228
EuroLine 30675, 30788,
31115, 31233, 31351
Fenner 30651
Ferguson 30695, 30651,
30713, 30898
Finlux 30741, 30591, 30770,
30672, 30751, 30783
Fintec 31530
Firstline 30713, 30843, 30869,
31530
Fisher 30670
Funai 30695, 30675
Gateway 31158
Germatic 31051
Global Link 31224
Global Solutions 30768
Global Sphere 31152
Go Video 30783, 30869
GoldStar 30741, 30591
Goodmans 30730, 30651,
30790, 30690, 30713, 30723,
30783, 31004, 31140, 31152,
31423, 31530
GPX 30741
Graetz 30665
Gran Prix 30831, 30898
Grandin 30713, 31233
Grundig 30539, 30551, 30695,
30651, 30790, 30670, 30713,
30775, 31004, 31036, 31128
Grunkel 30770, 30831, 30790
GVG 30770
H & B 30713, 30841, 30850,
31233, 31421
Hanseatic 30741, 30790,
30783
Harman/Kardon 30582,
30702
HCM 30788
HE 30730
Henss 30713
HiMAX 30843
Hitachi 30573, 30664, 30141,
30665, 30713, 31664, 31764
Hiteker 30672
Hoeher 30831, 30651, 30713,
30826, 31004, 31224, 31530
Home Electronics 30770,
30730
Home Tech Industries
31107, 31224
HotMedia 31152
Humax 30646
HYD 31233
Hyundai 30850
Iekei 31107
Ingelen 30788
Ingersol 31023
Initial 31472
Inno Hit 30713
Irradio 30869, 31115, 31224,
31233
IRT 30783
ISP 30695
Jamo 31036
Jaton 30665
JDB 30730
JDV 31367
JGC 31530
JMB 30695
JVC 30623, 30539, 30503,
30558, 30867, 31164, 31275,
31550
jWin 31051
Kansai 31107
Kansas Technologies 31233,
31530
Karcher 30783, 31367
Kendo 30831, 30672, 30713,
31483
Kennex 30770, 30713, 30898
Kenwood 30490, 30534
Kiiro 30770
Kiss 30665, 30841
KLH 31149
Kreisen 31421
KXD 31107, 31321
Lawson 30768
Leiker 30872
Lenco 30770, 30651, 30713,
30778
Lenoir 31228
Lexia 30768
LG 30741, 30591, 30790,
30869
Lifetec 30831, 30651, 31347
Limit 30768
LiteOn 31058, 31158, 31416
Lodos 30713
Loewe 30539, 30741, 30511
Logik 30713
Logix 30783
Luker 31367
Lumatron 30741, 30695,
30713, 31115, 31321
Lunatron 30741
Luxman 30573
Luxor 30713, 31004
Magnavox 30539, 30503,
30646, 30675, 30713, 30821,
31140
Magnex 30723
Majestic 31107
Manhattan 30713
Marantz 30539
Mark 30713
Marquant 30770
Mastec 31338
Matsui 30695, 30651, 30672,
30713, 31004
Maxim 30713, 30872, 31367
MBO 30730, 30690
MDS 30713, 30778
Mecotek 30770
Mediencom 30751
Medion 30741, 30630, 30831,
30651, 30783, 31107, 31270,
31347, 31423
MEI 30790
Memorex 30831
Metronic 30690
Metz 30571, 30525, 30713
MiCO 30723, 30751, 31223
Micromaxx 30695
Micromedia 30539, 30503
Micromega 30539, 31005
Microsoft 30522, 32083
Microstar 30831
Minato 30752
Minax 30713
Minoka 30770, 31115
Mirror 30752
Mitsubishi 30521, 30713,
31403
Mizuda 30770
Monyka 30665
MPX 30843
Mustek 30730
Mx Onda 30651, 30751,
31223
Mystral 30831
NAD 30741
Naiko 30770, 31004, 31367
Nakamichi 31222
Narita 31367
NEC 30785
Neufunk 30665
Nevir 30770, 30831, 30672
Nexius 30790
NFREN 30826
Nintaus 31051
Nordmende 30831
Noriko 30752
Okano 30752
Olidata 30672
Onkyo 30503, 30612, 30627,
31612, 31769, 32147
Oopla 31158
Oppo 30575
Optim 30843
Optimus 30525
Orbit 30872
Orion 30695, 30713, 31128,
31233
Oritron 30651
Ormond 30713
Pacific 30831, 30768, 30790,
30713, 30759
Packard Bell 30831, 31321
Palladium 30695, 30713,
30779
Panasonic 30490, 30632,
30703, 31010, 31011, 31579,
31641
Panda 30789, 31107
Paramount Pictures 30779
peeKTon 30898, 31224
Philco 30690, 30733
Philips 30539, 30503, 30646,
30675, 30854, 31158, 31267,
31340, 31354, 31506, 32056,
32084
Plu2 30850
Powerpoint 30872, 31005
Prinz 30831
Prism 30831
ProCaster 31004
Proline 30651, 30672, 30710,
31004, 31483
Proscan 30522
Proson 30713
Prosonic 30752
ProVision 30730, 31107,
31321
Pye 30539, 30646
QONIX 30790, 31051
Radionette 30741, 30869
Radiotone 30713
Raite 30665
RCA 30522
REC 30490
Redstar 30770, 30759, 30763,
30788, 30898, 31107
Relisys 31347
Reoc 30768, 30752
Revoy 30841
Richmond 31233
Roadstar 30730, 30672,
30690, 30713, 30898, 31051,
31227
Ronin 30710, 30872
Rotel 30623, 30558, 31178
Rownsonic 30789
Saba 30551, 30651
Saivod 30831, 30759, 31367
Salora 30741
Sampo 31321
Samsung 30490, 30573,
30199, 30744, 30899, 31044,
31075, 31635, 31748, 32107,
32269
Sansui 30695, 30751, 31228
Sanyo 30670, 30713, 31228
Scan 30850
ScanMagic 30730
Schaub Lorenz 30770, 30788,
31115, 31151
Schmartz 32367
Schneider 30539, 30831,
30646, 30651, 30790, 30713,
30779, 30783, 30788, 30869,
31227, 31367
Schoentech 30713
Schwaiger 30752
Scientific Labs 30768
Scott 30651, 30672, 31005,
31036, 31233, 31423
Seeltech 31224, 31338
SEG 30665, 30713, 30763,
30872, 31483, 31530
Shanghai 30672
Sharp 30630, 30675, 30713,
30752, 30869, 31256, 32250
Sherwood 30741
Sigmatek 31005, 31224
Siltex 31224
Silva 30788, 30898
Silva Schneider 30741,
30831, 30869, 30898, 31367
SilverCrest 31152
Sistemas 30672
Skantic 30539, 30713
Skymaster 30730, 30768
Skyworth 30898
Sliding 31115
SM Electronic 30730, 30768,
30690, 31152
Smart 30713
Sonic Blue 30783
Sony 30533, 30864, 31033,
31069, 31070, 31431, 31516,
31533, 31536
Sound Color 31233
Soundmaster 30768
Soundwave 30713, 30783,
31530
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 120
Additional information 12
121
En
Standard 30831, 30768,
30651, 30788, 30898
Star Clusters 31152, 31227
Starlogic 31005
Starmedia 31005, 31224
Strato 31152
Strong 30713
Sunkai 30770, 30850
Sunstech 30831
Sunwood 30788, 30898
Supervision 30768, 31152
SVA 30672, 30752
Sylvania 30675, 32194
Symphonic 30675
Synn 30768
Syscom 30826
TAG McLaren 30894
Tandberg 30713
Tangent 31321
Targa 30741, 31227
Tatung 30770
Tchibo 30741
TCM 30741, 30790
Teac 30741, 30768, 30759,
31227
Tec 30898
Technica 31367
Technics 30490, 30703
Technika 30770, 30831,
31115, 31530
Technisson 31115
Technosonic 31051, 31115,
31367
Techwood 30713, 31530
Tedelex 31228
Telefunken 30551
Teletech 30768, 30713
Tensai 30770, 30651, 30690
Tevion 30651, 30898, 31036,
31227, 31483
Theta Digital 30571
Thomson 30551, 30522
Tokai 30790, 30665, 30784,
30788, 30898, 31233
Tom-Tec 30789
Top Suxess 31224
Toshiba 30503, 30695, 31045,
31510, 31515, 31608, 31639,
31769
Tosumi 31367
TProgress 30752
TRANS-continents 30831,
30826, 30872, 31233, 31321
Tredex 30843
Trevi 30831
TSM 31224
TVE 30713
Umax 30690, 31151
United 30695, 30730, 30675,
30713, 30788, 30826, 31115,
31152, 31228, 31233, 31351,
31367
Universum 30741, 30591,
30790, 30713, 30779, 30869,
31227, 31530
Uptek 30763
Venturer 30790, 31769
Vestel 30713, 31530
Voxson 30730, 30831
Vtrek 31228
Waitec 30730, 31151, 31224,
31233
Waltham 30713, 31530
Welkin 30831
Wellington 30713
Weltstar 30713
Wharfedale 30790, 30713,
30751, 30752, 31115
Wilson 30831, 31233
Windsor 30713
Windy Sam 30573
Woxter 31005, 31151, 31224,
31338
Xbox 30522, 32083
Xenius 30790
Yakumo 31004, 31056
Yamada 30872, 31004, 31056,
31151, 31158, 31416
Yamaha 30490, 30539, 30646,
30497, 30545, 30817
Yamakawa 30665, 30710,
30872
Yukai 30730
Zenith 30503, 30591
Blu-ray
Pioneer 30142, 32442
Denon 32258
LG 30741
Onkyo 32147
Panasonic 31641
Philips 32084
Samsung 30199
Sharp 32250
Sony 31516
HD-DVD
LG 30741
Microsoft 32083
Onkyo 31769
Toshiba 31769
Xbox 32083
DVD-R
Pioneer 30631, 31460
4Kus 31158
Airis 31321, 31338
Alba 31530
Aristona 30646
BBK 31338
Belson 31086
Bush 31530
Cat 31421
Centrum 31227
Commax 31321, 31338
CyberHome 31502
Cytron 31347
Dayton 31158
Denver 31056, 31338
Digitrex 31056
Dual 31530
Durabrand 31502, 31530
E:max 31321
Electrohome 32116
Ellion 31421
Eltax 31321
Fintec 31530
Firstline 31530
Funai 30675
Gateway 31158
Goodmans 31530
GPX 30741
H & B 31421
Hitachi 30141
Hoeher 31530
Humax 30646
JGC 31530
JVC 31164, 31275
Kansas Technologies 31530
Kreisen 31421
KXD 31321
LG 30741
Lifetec 31347
LiteOn 31158, 31416
Loewe 30741
Lumatron 31321
Mastec 31338
Medion 30741, 31347
MiCO 30751
Oopla 31158
Packard Bell 31321
Panasonic 30490, 31010,
31011, 31579
Philips 30646, 31158, 31506
ProVision 31321
Pye 30646
Relisys 31347
Roadstar 31227
Samsung 31635, 31748,
32107
Schneider 30646, 31227
Seeltech 31338
SEG 31530
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070
Soundwave 31530
Star Clusters 31227
Sylvania 30675
Tangent 31321
Targa 30741, 31227
Teac 31227
Technika 31530
Techwood 31530
Tevion 31227
Thomson 30551
Toshiba 31510
Universum 31227, 31530
Vestel 31530
Waltham 31530
Woxter 31338
Yakumo 31056
Yamada 31056, 31158, 31416
Yamaha 30646
DVD/PVR
Combination
Pioneer 30631
Airis 31321
Blu:sens 31321
GPX 30741
Hitachi 30141
JGC 31530
JVC 30623
LG 30741
LiteOn 31416
Medion 30741
Mitsubishi 31403
Panasonic 30490, 31010,
31011, 31579
Philips 30539, 31158, 31340
Samsung 30490, 31635,
32107
SEG 31530
Sharp 31256
Silva Schneider 30741
Sony 31033, 31069, 31070,
31536
Soundwave 31530
Targa 30741
Tchibo 30741
TCM 30741
Technika 31530
Thomson 30551
Toshiba 31510, 31639
Universum 30741
Yamada 31416
DVD/VCR
Combination
Pioneer 31460
AEG 30675
Broksonic 30695
Bush 31483
Centrum 30675
Clatronic 30675
Daewoo 31483
Durabrand 30675
EuroLine 30675
Firstline 30869
Funai 30695, 30675
Go Video 30869
GoldStar 30741
Hitachi 30664, 30141
Irradio 30869
JVC 30867, 31164, 31550
Kendo 31483
LG 30741, 30869
Lumatron 30741, 30695
Lunatron 30741
Magnavox 30675
Micromaxx 30695
Orion 30695
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 121
Additional information 12
122
En
Panasonic 30490, 31579
Philips 30539, 30646, 30675,
31267
Proline 31483
Radionette 30869
Samsung 30744, 31075,
32269
Sanyo 30670
Schneider 30869
SEG 31483
Sharp 30630, 30869
Silva Schneider 30869
Sony 30864
Symphonic 30675
Tevion 31483
Thomson 30551
Toshiba 30503, 31045, 31510
United 30675
Universum 30869
CD
General
Pioneer 70032, 70468, 70101,
71063, 71087, 73468
Advantage 70032
AH! 70157
Aiwa 70157
Arcam 70157
Atoll Electronique 70157
Audio Research 70157
Audiolab 70157
Audiomeca 70157
Audioton 70157
AVI 70157
Balanced Audio
Technology 70157
Bush 70388
Cairn 70157
California Audio Labs 70029
Cambridge 70157
Cambridge Audio 70157
Cambridge Soundworks
70157
Carver 70157
Cyrus 70157
Denon 70626, 70034, 70766
DKK 70000
DMX Electronics 70157
Dynaco 70157
Genexxa 70000, 70032, 70037
Goldmund 70157
Grundig 70157
Harman/Kardon 70157
Inkel 70157, 70180
JVC 70072
Kenwood 70157, 70028,
70626, 70037
Krell 70157
Linn 70157
Loewe 70157
Magnavox 70157
Marantz 70157, 70029,
70626, 70180
Matsui 70157
MCS 70029
Memorex 70000, 70032,
70468, 70180
Meridian 70157
Micromega 70157
Miro 70000
Mission 70157
Modulaire 70000, 70032,
70468, 70087, 70180
Myryad 70157
NAD 70000
Naim 70157
Onkyo 70101, 70102, 70138,
70381, 70868, 71322, 71323,
71327
Optimus 70000, 70032,
70468, 71063
Panasonic 70029, 70388,
70752
Philips 70157, 70626
Primare 70157
Proton 70157
QED 70157
Quad 70157
Quasar 70029
Radiola 70157
RCA 70053
Realistic 70180
Restek 70157
Revox 70157
Rotel 70157
SAE 70157
Saisho 70000
Sansui 70157
Sanyo 70087
Sharp 70037, 70180
Sherwood 70180
Siemens 70157
Simaudio 70157
Sony 70000, 70100, 71364
Sylvania 70157
Symphonic 70180
TAG McLaren 70157
Tandy 70032
Technics 70029
Thomson 70053
Thorens 70157
Thule Audio 70157
Traxdata 70626
Universum 70157, 70053
Victor 70072
Wards 70000, 70157, 70032,
70053, 70087
Yamaha 70036, 71292
CD-R
Pioneer 71087
Kenwood 70626
Onkyo 71322, 71323
Philips 70626
Sony 70100
Thomson 70053
MD
Pioneer 71063
Onkyo 70868
Sony 70000
Satellite Set Top Box
General
Pioneer 00853, 00329, 01308
@sat 01300
@Sky 01334
Acoustic Solutions 01284
ADB 00642, 02367
Akai 00200
Alba 01284
Allsat 00200
Allvision 01232, 01334, 01412
Amstrad 00847, 01175, 01113
Ansonic 02418
Apro 01672
Armstrong 00200
Arnion 01300
Asat 00200
ASCI 01334
AssCom 00853
Astro 00173, 01100, 01113
Atlanta 02418
Atsat 01300
AtSky 01334
Audioline 01672
Austar 00879, 00642
Axil 01457, 02418
Axitronic 01626
B@ytronic 01412
Balmet 01457
Belson 02418
Big Sat 01457
Black Diamond 01284
Blaupunkt 00173
Boca 01232
Boston 01251
Brainwave 01672
British Sky Broadcasting
00847, 01175
BskyB 00847, 01175
Bush 00560, 01284, 01291,
01645, 01672, 01974
Canal Digital 00853
Canal Satellite 00853, 02107
Canal+ 00853, 02107
CGV 01567
Chaparral 00216
Chess 01334, 01626
CityCom 01176, 01232, 01781
Classic 01672
Comag 01232, 01412
Coship 01457, 01672
Crown 01284
Cyfra+ 01076
Cyrus 00200
D-box 00723, 01114
Daewoo 01974
Dantax 01626
Denver 02418
Digiality 01334
Digifusion 01645
Digihome 01284
DigiLogic 01284
DigiQuest 01300, 01457
DigiSat 01232
Digisky 01457
Digiturk 01076
DirecTV 00099
Dish Network System 00775
DNT 00200
Dream Multimedia 01237
DSTV 01433
Durabrand 01284
Echostar 00853, 00775,
01323, 01409
Elap 01567
Elbe 02418
Elta 00200
eMTech 01214
Engel 01251
EuroLine 01251
Expressvu 00775
Ferguson 01291
Finlux 01626
Fly Com 01457
FMD 01457
Fortec Star 01821
Foxtel 00879
Fuba 00173, 01214, 01251
Galaxis 00853
GbSAT 01214
Gecco 01412
General Satellite 01176
Globo 01251, 01334, 01412,
01626
GOD Digital 00200
Gold Box 00853
Goodmans 00560, 01284,
01291, 02337
Gradiente 00887
Grandin 01626
Grocos 01457
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 122
Additional information 12
123
En
Grundig 00847, 00853, 00173,
00879, 01284, 01291, 01672
Hama 01567
Hanseatic 01100
Hauppauge 01672
HB 01214
Hirschmann 00173, 01232,
01412
Hitachi 00819, 01284
Hornet 01300
HTS 00775
Hughes Network Systems
00749
Humax 01176, 01427, 01781,
01808, 01882, 01915, 02144,
02357, 02408
i-CAN 02367
ID Digital 01176
Imperial 01195, 01334, 01672
Inno Hit 01626
Interstar 01214
ITT Nokia 00723
Jaeger 01334
JVC 00492, 00775
Kaon 01300
Kathrein 00173, 00200,
01416, 01567
Kenwood 00853
Kreiling 01626
Kreiselmeyer 00173
L&S Electronic 01334
LaSAT 00173
Leiko 01626
Lemon 01334
Listo 01626
Lodos 01284
Logik 01284
Magnavox 00722
Manhattan 01300
Marantz 00200
Maspro 00173
Matsui 00173, 01284, 01626
Maximum 01334
Mediabox 00853
Mediacom 01206
MediaSat 00853, 02107
Medion 01232, 01334, 01412,
01626
Mega 00200
Metronic 01334
Metz 00173
Morgan's 00200, 01232,
01412
Multibroadcast 00879, 00642
Multichoice 00879, 00642,
01433, 01959, 01960
Myryad 00200
MySky 01848
NEOTION 01334
Netsat 00887, 00099
Neuling 01232
Nichimen 00560
Nikko 00723, 00200
Nokia 00853, 00723, 01223
OctalTV 01505
Onn 01284
Opentel 01232, 01412
Optex 01611, 01626
Optus 00879
Orbis 01232, 01334, 01412
Orbitech 01100, 01195
P/Sat 01232
Pace 00847, 00853, 00200,
00887, 01175, 00329, 01323,
01423, 01848
Pacific 01284
Palcom 01409
Panasat 00879, 01433
Panasonic 00847, 00701,
01304
Panda 00173
Pansat 01807
Pass 01567
peeKTon 01457, 02418
Philips 00853, 00173, 00200,
01114, 00099, 00722, 01076,
01672, 02107, 02176
Phoenix 02418
Pino 01334
Pixx 01807
PMB 01611
Preisner 01113
Premier 00723, 02176
Proline 01284
Proscan 00392
Radiola 00200
Radix 01113
RCA 00143, 00392, 00566
Rebox 01214
Regal 01251
RFT 00200
Roadstar 00853
Rownsonic 01567
SAB 01251, 01300
Saba 00820
Sagem 00820, 01114, 02107
Saivod 02418
Samsung 00853, 01206,
01458, 01570
Sanyo 01626
Sat Control 01300
SAT+ 01409
Satelco 01232
Satplus 01100
Schaub Lorenz 01214
Schneider 01206, 01251
Schwaiger 01334, 01412,
01457, 01672
Sedea Electronique 01206,
01626
SEG 01251, 01626
Serd 01412
Servimat 01611
ServiSat 01251
Siemens 00173, 01334
Sigmatek 02418
SKY 00847, 00887, 01175,
00099, 01848
SKY Italia 00853, 01848
Sky XL 01251, 01412
Sky+ 01175
Skymaster 01334, 01409,
01567, 01611
Skymax 00200
Skyplus 01175, 01232, 01334,
01412
Skyvision 01334
SL 01672
SM Electronic 01409
Smart 01113, 01232
Sony 00847, 00853, 00639,
01558
Star Sat 01214
Starlite 00200
Stream 01848
Stream System 01300
Strong 00853, 00820, 00879,
01284, 01409, 01626, 02418
Sumin 01412
Sunny 01300
Sunstar 00642
Supernova 00887
Systec 01334
Targa 01807
TBoston 01251, 02418
Technical 01626
TechniSat 01100, 01195
Technosonic 00560, 01672
Technotrend 01672
Techwood 01284, 01626
TELE System 01251, 01409,
01611
Telestar 01100, 01195, 01251,
01334, 01626, 01672
Televes 01214, 01300, 01334
Televisa 00887
Telewire 01232
Tevion 00560, 01409, 01672
Thomson 00847, 00853,
00820, 01175, 00392, 01046,
01291, 02107, 02176
Tiny 01672
Tokai 00200
Tonna 01611
Topfield 01206, 01208
Toshiba 00749, 00790, 01284
TPS 00820
Trevi 01251
Triax 00853, 00200, 01113,
01251, 01291, 01611, 01626
Twinner 01611
UEC 00879
Uniden 00722
Unisat 00200
United 01251
Universum 00173, 01251
Variosat 00173
VEA 02418
Ventana 00200
Vestel 01251, 01284
Victor 00492
Viola Digital 01672
Vision 01626
Visiosat 00560, 01457, 01807
Wharfedale 01284
Wisi 00173, 01232
Worldsat 01214, 01251
Woxter 02418
Xoro 01807
Xsat 00847, 01214, 01323
Xtreme 01300
Yes 00887
Zehnder 01232, 01251, 01334,
01412
Zeta Technology 00200
SAT/PVR
Combination
@sat 01300
Allvision 01412
Amstrad 01175
Atsat 01300
B@ytronic 01412
British Sky Broadcasting
01175
BskyB 01175
Bush 00560, 01645
Comag 01412
Daewoo 01974
Digifusion 01645
DigiQuest 01300
Digiturk 01076
Dish Network System 00775
Dream Multimedia 01237
eMTech 01214
GbSAT 01214
Gecco 01412
Globo 01412
Goodmans 00560
Hirschmann 01412
Humax 01176, 01427, 01808,
02144, 02357
Maximum 01334
Mediacom 01206
MediaSat 02107
Medion 01412
Morgan's 01412
MySky 01848
NEOTION 01334
Nichimen 00560
Opentel 01412
Orbis 01412
Pace 01175, 01423
Panasonic 01304
Philips 00099
Pixx 01807
Proscan 00392
Rebox 01214
Samsung 01206, 01570
Sat Control 01300
Schneider 01206
Schwaiger 01412
Sedea Electronique 01206
Serd 01412
SKY 01175, 01848
SKY Italia 01848
Sky XL 01412
Skyplus 01175, 01334, 01412
Stream System 01300
Sumin 01412
Sunny 01300
Targa 01807
TechniSat 01195
Technosonic 00560
Telestar 01195
Thomson 01175
Topfield 01206
Visiosat 00560, 01807
Xoro 01807
Xtreme 01300
Zehnder 01412
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 123
Additional information 12
124
En
Cable Set Top Box
General
Pioneer 00144, 00533, 00877,
01782
ABC 00008, 00237
ADB 01585
Austar 00276
Birmingham Cable
Communications 00276
Cable & Wireless 01068
Daeryung 00008
Encon 00008
Fosgate 00276
France Telecom 00817
Freebox 01482, 01976
Galaxi 00008
GE 00237
General Instrument 00276,
00476
GoldStar 00144
Humax 00660, 01813, 01885,
01981, 01983, 02142, 02447
i-CAN 01585
Jerrold 00276, 00476, 00810
Kabel Deutschland 01958,
01981, 01983
Macab 00817
Matav 01082
Memorex 00000
Motorola 00276
Noos 00817
Nova Vision 00008
NTL 01068, 01060, 00276
Ono 01068
Optus 00276
Orange 00817
Pace 01068, 01060, 00237,
01577
Panama 00107
Panasonic 00000, 00107,
00144
Paragon 00000
Philips 00817, 01582, 01619,
01958, 02174
Premier 02174
Pulsar 00000
Runco 00000
Sagem 00817
Salora 00000
Samsung 01060, 00000,
00144, 01666, 02015, 02174
Satbox 00375
Scientific Atlanta 00008,
00237, 00877, 01987
StarHub 00276, 01927
Supercable 00276
Telefonica 01585
Telenet 01920
Telewest 01068, 01987
Thomson 01256, 01582,
01958, 01981, 01983, 02174
Toshiba 00000
UPC 01582
US Electronics 00276
Virgin Media 01068, 01060,
01987
Visiopass 00817
Zenith 00000, 00525
Cable/PVR
Combination
Freebox 01482, 01976
Humax 01813, 01885, 01981,
01983, 02142
Philips 01619
Scientific Atlanta 01987
StarHub 01927
Telenet 01920
Telewest 01987
UPC 01582
Virgin Media 01987
Laser Disc Player
Pioneer 30241, 32447
Denon 30241
Magnavox 30241
Cassette Deck
Pioneer 40027, 42446
Aiwa 40029
Arcam 40076
Audiolab 40029
Carver 40029
Denon 40076
Grundig 40029
Inkel 40070
JVC 40244
Kenwood 40070
Magnavox 40029
Marantz 40029
Myryad 40029
Onkyo 40135
Optimus 40027
Philips 40029
Radiola 40029
Revox 40029
Sansui 40029
Sony 40243
Thorens 40029
Victor 40244
Wards 40029, 40027
Yamaha 40097
Digital Tape
Pioneer 40019
Onkyo 40019
Tascam 40019
Tescam 40019
Video Accessory
Pioneer 01010
Acer 01272
ADB 02586
Amino 01481
Daily Media 01272
Dgtec 01363
Fujitsu Siemens 01272
Hewlett Packard 01272
Kreatel 01385
Microsoft 01272, 02049
Packard Bell 01272
Philips 01272
Ricavision 01272
Sharp 01010
Sylvania 01563
VIA Technoloies 01272
Xbox 02049
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 124
Additional information 12
125
En
Specifications
These specifications are applicable when
the power supply is 230 V.
Audio section
Rated power output
Front, Center, Surround, Surround back
. . . . . . . 140 W per channel (1 kHz, 6 , 1 %)
105 W per channel
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 , 0.09 %)
Total Harmonic Distortion
. . . . . . . . 0.06 % (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 , 95 W/ch)
Guaranteed speaker impedance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 to 8 ,
less than 8 to 6 (setting required)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF, short circuited,
A network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 dB
Frequency Response
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Hz to 100 000 Hz dB
(Pure Direct Mode)
Input (Sensitivity/Impedance). . . . 284 mV/47 k
Output (Level/Impedance)
REC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 mV/2.2 k
Tuner Section
Frequency Range (FM) . . . 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz
Antenna Input (FM) . . . . . . . . . 75 unbalanced
Frequency Range (AM) . . . . 531 kHz to 1602 kHz
Antenna (AM). . . . . . . . Loop antenna (balanced)
Video Section
Signal level
Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vp-p (75 )
Component Video . . . . . . . . Y: 1.0 Vp-p (75 ),
PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p (75 )
Corresponding maximum resolution
Component Video . . . . . . . . . . . 1080p (1125p)
(Video convert off)
Digital In/Out Section
HDMI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-pin (Not DVI)
HDMI output type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 V, 100 mA
USB terminal . . . . . . USB2.0 Full Speed (Type A)
iPod terminal . . . . . USB, and Video (Composite)
Integrated control section
Control (SR) terminal . . 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
Control (IR) terminal. . . 3.5 Mini-jack (MONO)
IR signal. . . . . . . . High Active (High Level: 2.0 V)
Miscellaneous
Power requirements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC 220 V to 230 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 W
In standby . . . . . . . 0.5 W (KURO LINK OFF)
0.8 W (KURO LINK ON)
Dimensions
. . . . . . 420 mm (W) x 158 mm (H) x 349 mm (D)
Weight (without package) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 kg
Furnished Parts Number
MCACC Setup microphone (APM7008) . . . . . . 1
Remote control unit (AXD7553 (VSX-1019AH-K/
VSX-919AH-K)/AXD7555 (VSX-1019AH-S/VSX-
919AH-S)). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AA/IEC R6 dry cell batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
iPod cable (ADE7129). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
AM loop antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
FM wire antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Power cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warranty card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
These operating instructions
Note
Specifications and the design are subject
to possible modifications without notice,
due to improvements.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 125
Additional information 12
126
En
Cleaning the unit
Use a polishing cloth or dry cloth to wipe
off dust and dirt.
When the surface is dirty, wipe with a soft
cloth dipped in some neutral cleanser
diluted five or six times with water, and
wrung out well, and then wipe again with a
dry cloth. Do not use furniture wax or
cleansers.
Never use thinners, benzine, insecticide
sprays or other chemicals on or near this
unit, since these will corrode the surface.
This product includes FontAvenue

fonts licenced by
NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark
of NEC Corporation
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 126
Discover the benefits of registering your product online at
http://www.pioneer.co.uk (or http://www.pioneer.eu)
<XRB3105-A>
K002_B_En
Printed in
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901, 905-479-4411
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright 2009 Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
VSX-1019_SVYXJ.book 128

You might also like